2007 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M - my.gm.com · Airbag System ..... 71 Restraint System Check ......

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 18Safety Belts ............................................ 20Child Restraints ...................................... 42Airbag System ........................................ 71Restraint System Check ......................... 90

Features and Controls ................................ 93Keys ....................................................... 95Doors and Locks .................................. 100Windows ............................................... 104Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 107Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ....... 109Mirrors .................................................. 125OnStar® System ................................... 128Storage Areas ...................................... 132Sunroof ................................................ 136

Instrument Panel ....................................... 137Instrument Panel Overview ................... 140Climate Controls ................................... 155Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 161Audio System(s) ................................... 182

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 227Your Driving, the Road, and Your

Vehicle .............................................. 228Towing ................................................. 284

Service and Appearance Care .................. 301Service ................................................. 304Fuel ...................................................... 306Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 312All-Wheel Drive ..................................... 353Headlamp Aiming ................................. 355

2007 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M

1

Bulb Replacement ................................ 358Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement ..................................... 364Tires ..................................................... 366Appearance Care .................................. 399Vehicle Identification ............................. 408Electrical System .................................. 409Capacities and Specifications ................ 414

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 417Maintenance Schedule .......................... 418

Customer Assistance Information ............. 439Customer Assistance and Information ..... 440Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 452Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ....... 455

Index .......................................................... 457

2

SATURN, the SATURN Emblem, and thename VUE are registered trademarks of SaturnCorporation. GENERAL MOTORS and GMare registered trademarks of General MotorsCorporation.

This manual includes the latest information atthe time it was printed. We reserve the rightto make changes after that time without furthernotice.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle so it will be thereif it is needed. If the vehicle is sold, leave thismanual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

About Driving Your VehicleAs with other vehicles of this type, failure tooperate this vehicle correctly may result in lossof control or an accident. Be sure to read the“on-pavement” and “off-road” driving guidelines inthis manual. See Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle on page 228 and Off-Road Drivingon page 247.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15860080 B Second Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive theirnew vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in the ownermanual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or “DoNot let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shownalong with the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Seats ................................................ 9Driver Seat Height Adjuster ......................... 10Power Seat ................................................. 10Manual Lumbar ........................................... 11Heated Seats .............................................. 11Manual Reclining Seatbacks ........................ 12Head Restraints .......................................... 15Passenger Folding Seatback ....................... 16

Rear Seats .................................................... 18Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 18

Safety Belts .................................................. 20Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 20Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 25Driver Position ............................................. 26Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 34

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 35Right Front Passenger Position ................... 35Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 36Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 39Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 41Safety Belt Extender ................................... 41

Child Restraints ............................................ 42Older Children ............................................. 42Infants and Young Children ......................... 45Child Restraint Systems .............................. 49Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 53Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 55Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Outside Seat Position ...................... 61Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Rear Seat Position ....................... 64Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 66

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 71Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 75When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 77What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 79How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 80What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 80Passenger Sensing System ......................... 82

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 88Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 89Restraint System Check ............................... 90

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 90Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 91

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat withyour body to be sure the seat is locked in place.

9

Driver Seat Height Adjuster

If your vehicle has a manual driver seat heightadjuster, it is located on the outboard side of theseat near the front of the seat cushion. To raise theseat, move the lever upward repeatedly until theseat is at the desired height. To lower the seat,move the lever downward repeatedly until theseat is at the desired height.

Power Seat

If the vehicle has a power seat, the control usedto operate it is located on the outboard side of thedriver’s seat. To adjust the seat do any of thefollowing:• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding

the control forward or rearward.• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion

by moving the front of the control up or down.• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion

by moving the rear of the control up or down.

10

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle hasthis feature, the knobis located on the frontof the driver seatlower cushion on theinboard side.

Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the lumbar support.

Heated Seats

Your vehicle mayhave heated seats.The switches arelocated below theclimate control systemand forward of theshift lever.

Press 1 to warm the seat. Press 2 for a highertemperature setting. To turn this feature off, movethe switch to the center position.

11

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull onthe seatback to be sure it is locked.

12

To recline the seatback on the driver’s seat, lift thelever on the rear outboard side of the seat andmove the seatback to the desired position. Thenrelease the lever to lock the seatback in place.

To recline the seatback on the front passenger’sseat, lift the lever, located on the outboard side ofthe seat, up fully to disengage the seatback. Thenmove the seatback to the desired position. Releasethe lever to lock the seatback in place.

13

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

14

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it. To lowerthe head restraint,press the button,located on the top of theseatback, and pushthe restraint down.

15

Passenger Folding SeatbackThe front passenger’s seatback folds flat.

{CAUTION:

If you fold the seatback forward to carrylonger objects, such as skis, be sure anysuch cargo is not near an airbag. In acrash, an inflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. This could causesevere injury or even death. Secureobjects away from the area in whichan airbag would inflate. For moreinformation, see Where Are the Airbags?on page 75 and Loading Your Vehicle onpage 279.

{CAUTION:

Things you put on this seatback canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash. Remove or secureall items before driving.

To fold the seatback, do the following:

1. Lower the head restraint all the way.

2. Lift the bar under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat as far back as itwill go and release the bar. Try to movethe seat back and forth to make sureit is locked into place.

16

3. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboardside of the seat, up fully and fold the seatbackforward until it disengages.

4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locksin the folded position.

5. Pull up on the seatback to be sure it islocked.

17

To raise the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboardside of the seat, up fully and push up on theseatback.

2. Continue raising the seatback until theseatback re-engages.

{CAUTION:


3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked in place.

The recliner lever is also used to recline theseatback while a passenger is seated. See ManualReclining Seatbacks on page 12.

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatThe rear split bench seatbacks have threeavailable positions — folded forward, upright, orpartially reclined. Each of the rear seatbackscan be moved to any of the three positionsindependent of the other seatback position.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed,not properly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure thatthe safety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

18

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

Prior to lowering the seatback, ensure all three ofthe seatbelts are unbuckled and the front seatsare not reclined.

{CAUTION:


Lift the lever on the upper back corner of theseatback to move it to the desired position andthen release it. Push and pull on the seatback tobe sure it is locked in place.

19

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts. SeeSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 164 andPassenger Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 165.

20

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes canbe so serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

21

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

22

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

23

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

24

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drivefar from home, why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And there aredifferent rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 42 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 45. Follow those rules for everyone’sprotection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

25

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 41.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 34.

26

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

27

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

28


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

29


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

30


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your beltgoes over an armrest like this. The beltwould be much too high. In a crash, youcan slide under the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied at the abdomen,not at the pelvic bones, and that couldcause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure thebelt goes under the armrests.

31


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

32


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourretailer to fix it.

33

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portionof the belt is centered on your shoulder. The beltshould be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulder beltheight adjustment could reduce the effectivenessof the safety belt in a crash.

To move it up or down,squeeze the releasebuttons (A) togetherand move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition.

After you move the height adjuster to whereyou want it, try to move it up or down withoutsqueezing the release buttons to make sure it haslocked into position.

34

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protectthe mother. When a safety belt is worn properly,it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 26.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

35

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.And they can strike others in the vehicle whoare wearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

36

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.

For the center rear position, if the belt stopsbefore it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plateand keep pulling until you can buckle it.For the outboard rear positions, when theshoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it willlock. If it does, let it go back all the wayand start again.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 41.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

37

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

38

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outboard passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from its storage clip, whichis behind the seatback. Pull the elastic cordout from between the edge of the seatbackand the interior body.

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt.The elastic cord must be under the belt.Then, place the guide over the belt, andinsert the two edges of the belt into the slotsof the guide.

39

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt could

CAUTION: (Continued)


be seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 36. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

40

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Pull the guide upwardto expose its storage clip, and then slide theguide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inwardand slide them in between the seatback andthe interior body, leaving only the loop ofthe elastic cord exposed.

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met. And, ifyour vehicle has roof-mounted rollover airbags,safety belt pretensioners can help tighten thesafety belts in a side crash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activatein a crash, you will need to get new ones,and probably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 91.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your retailerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enough for you.To help avoid personal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for the seat it ismade to fit. The extender has been designedfor adults. Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.For more information, see the instruction sheetthat comes with the extender.

41

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt shouldfit snugly below the hips, just touching the topof the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severeor even fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

42

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the centerof the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 39. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safetybelt buckle. In either case, be sure thatthe shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,so that in a crash the child’s upper bodywould have the restraint that belts provide.

43

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

44

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

45

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it.For example, in a crash at only25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) babywill suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg)force on a person’s arms. A baby shouldbe secured in an appropriate restraint.

46

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

47

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

48

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

49

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

50

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat canalso help a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,or position children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint systemis a portable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured in thevehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,the child has to be secured within the childrestraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint,be sure the child restraint is designed tobe used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or ina booklet, or both.

51

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Makesure the child restraint is properlyinstalled in the vehicle using the vehicle’ssafety belt or LATCH system, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions inthis manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 55 formore information. A child can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, referto the instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

52

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing thechild within the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat.

We recommend that children be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an older child ridingin a booster seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

53

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off.



We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, werecommend that rear-facing child restraints not betransported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

54

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicleand attachments on the child restraint thatare made for use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never be installed using onlythe top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturerwill provide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

55

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints that have top tethers aredesigned for use with or without the top tether beingattached. Others require the top tether always tobe attached. In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. In theUnited States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

56

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

Each rear seating position has exposed metalanchors located in the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

The top tether anchors are located on the backof the rear seatback. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of the vehicle asthe seating position where the child restraintwill be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restrainton page 53 for additional information.

Rear Seat

57

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

58

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraintso children cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint hasbeen installed. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

59

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether overthe seatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether aroundthe head restraint.

60

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the head restraintand route the tetherunder the head restraintand in between the headrestraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearOutside Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

61

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

62

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and to Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 55.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let itgo back all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

63

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Rear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.



Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

64


4. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

65

5. If your child restraint has a top tether, attachand tighten the top tether to the top tetheranchor. Refer to the instructions that came withthe child restraint and to Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 55.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let itgo back all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’sairbag. A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 53.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system is designedto turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbagwhen an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a smallchild in a forward-facing child restraint or boosterseat is detected. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 82 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 166 for more information on this includingimportant safety information.

66

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off.



We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.


If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, werecommend that rear-facing child restraints notbe transported in your vehicle, even if the airbagis off.

67

If your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 55 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when andas the instructions say.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontalairbag. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 82. We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.See Manual Seats on page 9.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passengerairbag status indicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 166.



68


5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

69

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt. Youshould not be able to pull more of the belt fromthe retractor once the lock has been set.


If the airbag is off, the off indicator will be lit andstay lit when you start the vehicle.

If a child restraint has been installed and theon indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove thechild restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all theway. The safety belt will move freely againand be ready to work for an adult or largerchild passenger.

70

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driverand a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted sideimpact airbags designed for either side impact orrollover deployment. Roof-mounted side impactairbags are available for the driver and thepassenger seated directly behind the driver andfor the right front passenger and the passengerseated directly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impactairbags, the words AIR BAG will appear on theairbag covering on the ceiling near the driver’s andright front passenger’s window.

Even if you have no right front passenger seatin your vehicle there is still an active frontal airbagin the right side of the instrument panel. Do notplace cargo in front of this airbag.

{CAUTION:

Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. Ina crash, an inflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. This could causesevere injury or even death. Secure objectsaway from the area in which an airbagwould inflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? on page 75 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 279.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

71

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.



Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflatein rollover, rear crashes, or in many sidecrashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.


72


Roof-mounted rollover airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle or during a vehicle rollover.They may inflate in some frontal crashes.They are not designed to inflate in rearcrashes. If your vehicle has roof-mountedairbags, they are designed to provideboth side impact protection androllover protection. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and roof-mounted side impactairbags inflate with great force, faster thanthe blink of an eye. If you are too close toan inflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

73

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbagsplus lap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 42 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 45.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 165 for more information.

74

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

75

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the driver and the person seated directlybehind the driver, it is in the ceiling above theside windows.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger and the personseated directly behind that passenger, it is inthe ceiling above the side windows.

76

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupantand an airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anything betweenan occupant and an airbag, and do notattach or put anything on the steeringwheel hub or on or near any other airbagcovering. And, if your vehicle hasroof-mounted side impact airbags, neversecure anything to the roof of your vehicleby routing the rope or tie down through anydoor or window opening. If you do, the pathof an inflating side impact airbag will beblocked. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

77

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts,these airbags inflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontal impacts,full deployment occurs. If the front of your vehiclegoes straight into a wall that does not move ordeform, the threshold level for the reduceddeployment is about 10 to 15 mph (16 to 24 km/h),and the threshold level for a full deployment isabout 17 to 25 mph (27 to 40 km/h). The thresholdlevel can vary, however, with specific vehicledesign, so that it can be somewhat above orbelow this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,the airbags could inflate at a differentcrash speed than if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

78

Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mountedside impact airbags and a rollover sensor. SeeAirbag System on page 71. These roof-mounted“rollover capable” side impact airbags are intendedto inflate in moderate to severe side crashes, andduring a rollover. They may also inflate in somefrontal crashes. Both rollover capable side impactairbags will inflate if the crash severity is above thesystem’s designed “threshold level.” The thresholdlevel can vary with specific vehicle design. Sideimpact airbags are not intended to inflate in rearimpacts. Both side impact airbags will deploy wheneither side of the vehicle is struck. If your vehicledoes not have a right front passenger seat and arear seat, only the driver’s frontal airbag will deployin a frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For side impact airbags, inflation isdetermined by the location and severity ofthe impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. Additionally, in the case of a “rollovercapable” roof-mounted side impact airbag, thesensing system detects that the vehicle is about toroll over. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.

For the frontal airbags, the inflator, airbag, andrelated hardware are all part of the airbag modulesinside the steering wheel and in the instrumentpanel in front of the right front passenger.For vehicles with roof-mounted rollover airbags,the airbag modules, the inflator, and the airbagsare located in the ceiling of the vehicle, nearthe side windows.

79

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderateto severe side collisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbagssupplement the protection provided by safety belts.Airbags distribute the force of the impact moreevenly over the occupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually. But the frontal airbagswould not help you in many types of collisions,including rollovers, rear impacts, and many sideimpacts, primarily because an occupant’s motionis not toward the airbag. Roof-mounted rolloverairbags would not help you in many types ofcollisions, including many frontal or near frontalcollisions, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, andthen only in moderate to severe frontal ornear-frontal collisions for the driver’s and rightfront passenger’s frontal airbags, and onlyin moderate to severe side collisions or rolloversfor vehicles with roof-mounted rollover airbags.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realizethe airbag inflated. Some components of theairbag module may be hot for a short time. Thesecomponents include the steering wheel hub for thedriver’s frontal airbag and the instrument panel forthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag. Forvehicles with roof-mounted side impact airbags,the ceiling of your vehicle near the side windowsmay be hot. The parts of the airbag that come intocontact with you may be warm, but not too hot totouch. There may be some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbaginflation does not prevent the driver from seeing orbeing able to steer the vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

80

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior dome lampon, and flash the exterior lamps on and off whenthe airbags inflate. You can lock the doorsagain and turn the interior lamps off by using thedoor lock and interior lamp controls. You mustfirst, however, turn your ignition key to thefollowing ignition switch positions:

1. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

2. Turn the ignition key to RUN.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate anairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation.

81

Additional windshield breakage may also occurfrom the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy on page 455 and Event DataRecorders on page 455.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can meanthat the airbag system will not work properly.See your retailer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theinstrument panel will be visible when you turnyour ignition key to RUN or START.

The words ON and OFF or the symbol for onand off, will be visible during the system check.When the system check is complete, eitherthe word ON or the word OFF, or the symbolfor on or the symbol for off will be visible.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 166.

United States Canada

82

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. We recommend that child restraintsbe secured in a rear seat, including an infantriding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding ina forward-facing child seat, and an older childriding in a booster seat.

If your vehicle has a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, thereis a label on your sun visor that says, “Neverput a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facing child is so greatif the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

83

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat thatwill accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,never put a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the right front passenger seat unless thepassenger airbag status indicator shows offand the airbag is off. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.


84

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the offindicator on the instrument panel will light andstay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and theon indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove thechild restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraint

manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 66.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing thechild restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust theseat cushion if possible. Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle if one is available and check withyour retailer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbag is active.

85

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbag.

86

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the airbag(s). See AirbagReadiness Light on page 165 for moreon this, including important safetyinformation.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers,can affect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. Remove any additional material fromthe seat cushion before reinstalling or securingthe child restraint and before a small occupant,

including a small adult, sits in the passengerposition. You may want to consider not usingseat covers or other aftermarket equipment ifyour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 89.

The passenger sensing system may suppress theairbag deployment when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the off indicator in thepassenger airbag status indicator and the airbagreadiness light on the instrument panel will be lit.The system should resume normal operation afterthe seat is allowed to dry. If the system operatesincorrectly after the seat has dried, have yourretailer check the system.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

87

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag systemin several places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your retailer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchasea service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 453.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

88

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, frontend or side sheet metal, they may keep theairbag system from working properly. Also,the airbag system may not work properly if yourelocate any of the airbag sensors. If you haveany questions about this, you should contactCustomer Assistance before you modify yourvehicle. The phone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are in Step Two ofthe Customer Satisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 440.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceilingand pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbagmodules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure onpage 440.

89

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 402for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the side impact airbag covering (if equipped)on the ceiling near the side windows, the airbagmay not work properly. You may have to replacethe airbag module in the steering wheel, boththe airbag module and the instrument panel forthe right front passenger’s airbag, or sideimpact airbag module and ceiling covering forroof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped.)Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

90

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle or while you are driving.See Airbag Readiness Light on page 165.

91

✍ NOTES

92

Keys .............................................................. 95Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 96Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ................................................. 97Doors and Locks ........................................ 100

Door Locks ................................................ 100Power Door Locks ..................................... 101Delayed Locking ........................................ 101Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 101Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 102Lockout Protection ..................................... 103Liftgate ...................................................... 103

Windows ...................................................... 104Power Windows ........................................ 105Sun Visors ................................................ 106

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 107Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 107Passlock® .................................................. 108

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 109New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 109Ignition Positions ....................................... 109Starting the Engine .................................... 111Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 113Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 114Manual Transaxle Operation ...................... 117Parking Brake ........................................... 119Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 120Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 121Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transaxle) ... 122Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 122Engine Exhaust ......................................... 123Running the Engine While Parked ............. 124

Mirrors ......................................................... 125Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar®, Compass andTemperature Display .............................. 125

Section 2 Features and Controls

93

Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 127Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 128

OnStar® System .......................................... 128Storage Areas ............................................. 132

Glove Box ................................................. 132Cupholder(s) .............................................. 132

Floor Console Storage Area ...................... 132Center Console Storage Area .................... 132Cargo Area ............................................... 132Roof Rack System .................................... 134

Sunroof ....................................................... 136

Section 2 Features and Controls

94

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignitionand they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.

95

One key is used for the ignition and all ofthe locks.

Key code information can be obtained only at thedealer/retailer where your vehicle was purchased.These code numbers can be used to make newkeys. Additional keys that are needed can be madeat any dealer/retailer provided you have the keycode information. Store this information in a safeplace, but not in your vehicle.

Have extra keys made. Your service partsdepartment can make extra keys for you.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemThe remote keyless entry system operateson a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

96

At times you may notice a decrease in range.This is normal for any remote keyless entrysystem. If the transmitter does not work or ifyou have to stand closer to your vehicle for thetransmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement orresynchronization is necessary. See “BatteryReplacement” and “Resynchronization”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 97.

• If you are still having trouble, see yourdealer/retailer or authorized service providerfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationWith this feature, you can lock and unlock thedoors from about 32 feet (10 m) away using theremote keyless entry transmitter supplied with yourvehicle.

Q (Lock): Press thisbutton on the remotekeyless entry transmitterto lock the doors.This also arms thecontent theft-deterrentsystem. See ContentTheft-Deterrent onpage 107 for informationon arming the contenttheft-deterrent system.

97

Your vehicle can be programmed so that theparking lamps or Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)will flash and/or the horn will sound when youlock the doors with the remote keyless entrytransmitter. See your retailer for more informationon programming this feature.

" (Unlock): Press this button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter to unlock the driver’sdoor. This also disarms the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Content Theft-Deterrent onpage 107 for information on disarming the contenttheft-deterrent system. Press the button againwithin 5 seconds to unlock the rest of the doors.

Your vehicle can be programmed so that theparking lamps or DRL will flash and/or the horn willsound when you unlock the doors with the remotekeyless entry transmitter. See your retailer for moreinformation on programming this feature.

L (Panic Alarm): Press the button with the hornsymbol when the ignition is turned off. The hornwill sound and the parking lamps or DRL anddome lamp will flash for up to two minutes.To stop the panic alarm, press this button again.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking yourvehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through yourretailer. Remember to bring any remainingtransmitters with you when you go to your retailer.When the retailer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remainingtransmitters must also be matched. Once yourretailer has coded the new transmitter, the losttransmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Eachvehicle can have a maximum of four transmittersmatched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remotekeyless entry transmitter should last aboutfour years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwill not work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it is probably time to changethe battery.

98

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Static fromyour body transferred to these surfaces maydamage the transmitter.

1. Use a flat thin object to pry open thetransmitter.

2. Once the transmitter is separated, use apencil or similar object to remove the oldbattery. Do not use a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery as the instructionsunder the cover indicate.

4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly tobe sure no moisture can enter.

5. Check the operation of the transmitter.

If the transmitter does not work, try synchronizingyour transmitter with your receiver. See“Resynchronization” for more information.

ResynchronizationThis is used to keep the transmitter of the vehiclecommunicating with the receiver of the vehicle.Resynchronization may be required due tothe security method used by this system.

Your vehicle has an automatic resynchronizationfunction built into the system. If your transmitter isnot working properly and you have to manuallyresynchronize, press the lock and unlock buttonsat the same time for seven seconds while youare near your vehicle. The doors will lock orunlock, depending on their starting position.If they do not, contact your retailer for service.

99

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out ofa moving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crashif the doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, turn the key in the driver’sdoor lock counterclockwise to lock the door andclockwise to unlock it or use the remote keylessentry transmitter.

From the inside, move the manual lock control onthe door or use the power door lock switch.

100

Power Door Locks

The power door lockswitches are located onthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s doors.Press the bottom of theswitch to lock all doors.Press the top of theswitch to unlock alldoors.

Delayed LockingThis feature will delay the actual locking of thedoors and arming of the theft-deterrent systemfor five seconds when the power door lock switchor remote keyless entry transmitter is used tolock the vehicle.

If any door is open when locking the vehicle,three chimes will sound signaling that the delayedlocking feature is active. Five seconds after thelast door is closed, all of the doors will lock.

To cancel the delay and lock the doorsimmediately, press the lock button on theremote keyless entry transmitter or the powerdoor lock switch a second time. The theft deterrentsystem will arm after 30 seconds.

Programmable Automatic DoorLocks

Automatic LockingIf your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, all thedoors and liftgate will automatically lock whenthe ignition is in RUN and the shift lever is movedout of PARK (P).

If your vehicle has a manual transaxle, all thedoors and liftgate will automatically lock whenthe vehicle reaches a speed of more than3 mph (5 km/h).

All doors must be closed. The automatic lockingfeature cannot be disabled.

101

In the following situations, all doors will lock againwhen:

• The brake pedal is applied, a door is openedand then closed, and the brake pedal isreleased, for a vehicle with an automatictransaxle.

• A door is opened and then closed while thevehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h),for a vehicle with an manual transaxle.

Programmable Automatic UnlockingIf your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, allthe doors and liftgate will automatically unlockwhen the shift lever is moved into PARK (P).

If your vehicle has a manual transaxle, allthe doors and liftgate will automatically unlockwhen the key is removed from the ignition.

The unlocking feature can be programmed on oroff by turning the ignition to RUN, engine notrunning, and pressing the unlock part of the powerdoor lock switch for eight seconds. The horn willchirp once when this feature is on and twice whenit is off.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks thatprevent passengers from opening the rear doorsfrom the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door.

To set the rear door security locks, do thefollowing:

1. Insert the key into the lock and turn itcounterclockwise (left) for the driver’s side andclockwise (right) for the passenger’s side.

2. Close the door.

102

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entrytransmitter, the power door lock switch, or bylifting the rear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the lock and turn itclockwise (right) for the driver’s sideand counterclockwise (left) for thepassenger’s side.

Lockout ProtectionIf you press the power door lock switch when thekey is in the ignition and any door is open, allthe doors will lock and then the driver’s door willunlock. Be sure to remove the key from the ignitionwhen locking your vehicle.

If the remote keyless entry transmitter is usedto lock the doors while the key is in the ignition,a chime will sound three times. All doors willthen lock.

Liftgate

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle.You cannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the liftgate open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through theseal between the body and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System on page 155.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all theway. See Engine Exhaust on page 123.

103

Use your remote keyless entry transmitter orpower door lock switches to unlock the liftgate.

To open the liftgate, lift the handle located in thecenter of the liftgate.

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

104

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome fromextreme heat in warm or hot weather andsuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignitionand they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in a vehiclewith children.



When there are children in the rear seatuse the window lockout button to preventunintentional operation of the windows.

The window switchesare located on eachside of the shift leveron the center console.

To lower a window, press the switch down.To raise a window, pull the switch up.

The power windows operate when the ignitionis in RUN or ACC.

105

A window switch is also located on each reardoor. Press the bottom of the switch to lower thewindow. Press the top of the switch to raisethe window.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window switch has an express-downfeature that is labeled AUTO. This allows thedriver’s window to open fully without havingto continuously press the switch. Press the switchto the second position and the driver’s windowwill go all the way down. To stop the windowfrom lowering, lift the switch all the way up andrelease it.

Window LockoutThe driver’s window switches also include a lockoutswitch. Press the left side of the switch to preventrear passengers from using their window switches.The driver can still control all the windows with thelockout on. Press the right side of the windowlockout switch to return to normal windowoperation.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare swing the visors down or tothe side. The driver’s sun visor can be detachedfrom the center mount and slid along the rodto block different areas of the front window.

Visor Vanity MirrorsYour vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors.

106

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothingwe put on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentThe remote keyless entry transmitter is used toarm/disarm the theft-deterrent system. Yourvehicle’s theft-deterrent system can beprogrammed to three different modes.

Active Arming: The system will arm when thelock button on the remote keyless entry transmitteris pressed. The system will disarm when theunlock button is pressed.

Passive Arming: The system will arm itselfone minute after the ignition is turned off andthe driver’s door has been opened and closed.If the lock button on the transmitter is pressedbefore the minute has passed, the system willarm immediately. The system will disarm whenthe unlock button is pressed.

Security System Disable: The system willnot arm.

To change the mode that your vehicle isprogrammed to, do the following:1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC.2. Press the panic alarm button on the

transmitter slowly four times withinfive seconds.

3. You must complete one of the following withinthree seconds to change the mode.• To select the active arming mode, press the

lock button on the transmitter.• To select the passive arming mode, press

the lock button on the transmitter twicewithin 3 seconds.

• To select the security system disable mode,press the unlock button on the transmitter.

A chime will sound once the mode has beenselected.

If you accidentally set off the alarm whenentering/exiting the vehicle, you can shut it offby pressing any button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter other than the panic alarm button.

If you hear three horn chirps when you press theunlock button on the transmitter, that means thevehicle’s alarm was triggered while you were away.

107

Passlock®

Your vehicle is equipped with thePasslock® theft-deterrent system.

This light will come onfor the theft-deterentsystem.

Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder isturned with a valid key. If a correct key is not usedor the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel isdisabled.

During normal operation, the security light will gooff approximately five seconds after the key isturned to RUN following an engine start.

If the engine stalls and the security light flashes,wait until the light stops flashing before tryingto restart the engine. Remember to release thekey from START as soon as the engine starts.

If the engine is running and the security light comeson, you will be able to restart the engine if you turnthe engine off. However, your Passlock® systemis not working properly and must be serviced byyour retailer. Your vehicle is not protected byPasslock® at this time. You may also want tocheck the fuses, see Fuses and Circuit Breakerson page 409. See your retailer for service. Also,see Roadside Assistance Program on page 445 formore information.

108

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timethe new brake linings are not yet broken in.Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 290 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

Ignition Positions

With the key in theignition switch, you canturn it to four differentpositions. A warningtone will sound if youopen the driver’s doorwhen the key has notbeen removed fromthe ignition.

9 (LOCK): This position locks your steeringcolumn. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will onlybe able to remove your key when the ignition isturned to LOCK.

109

If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shiftlever is in PARK (P).

Notice: Using a tool to force the key fromthe ignition switch could cause damageor break the key. Use the correct key and turnthe key only with your hand. Make sure thekey is all the way in. If it is, turn the steeringwheel left and right while you turn the keyhard. If none of this works, then your vehicleneeds service.

{CAUTION:

If you have a manual transaxle removingthe key from the ignition switch will lockthe steering column and result in a lossof ability to steer the vehicle. This couldcause a collision. If you need to turn theengine off while the vehicle is moving,turn the key to ACC.

ACC (Accessory): This position operates someof your electrical accessories. It unlocks thesteering wheel and ignition.

R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns toafter you start your engine and release the switch.The switch stays in RUN when the engine isrunning. But even when the ignition is not running,you can use RUN to operate your electricalaccessories and to display some warning andindicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the key inthe ACC or RUN position with the engine off. Youmay not be able to start your vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extended period of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine. Whenthe engine starts, release the key. The ignitionswitch will return to RUN for normal driving.

110

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.The battery could be drained if you leave thekey in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

Automatic TransaxleMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not startin any other position -- this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shift intoPARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

Manual TransaxleThe shift lever should be in the neutral position andthe parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal tothe floor and start the engine. Your vehicle will notstart if the clutch pedal is not all the way down. Thatis a safety feature.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your engine gets warm. Donot race the engine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine and transaxle gentlyto allow the oil to warm up and lubricateall moving parts.Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components. Ifthe ignition key is turned to the START position,and then released when the engine beginscranking, the engine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until the vehicle starts.

111

If the engine does not start and the key is heldin START for many seconds, cranking will bestopped after 15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACC or LOCK position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods oftime, by returning the key to the START positionimmediately after cranking has ended, canoverheat and damage the cranking motor,and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow the cranking motorto cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor and holding it there as you

hold the key in START for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds betweeneach try, to allow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts, let go of the keyand accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engine and transaxlegently until the oil warms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour retailer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

112

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have this feature. In very coldweather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolantheater can provide easier starting and betterfuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), useof the coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The engine coolant heater cord islocated near the air cleaner box on thepassenger side of the engine compartment.See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 314 for more information on location.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact your retailer in the areawhere you will be parking your vehicle. Thedealer/retailer can give you the best advicefor that particular area.

113

Automatic Transaxle OperationIf your vehicle is equipped with an automatictransaxle, the shift lever is located on the consolebetween the seats.

There are severaldifferent positions forthe automatic transaxle.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 120. If you are pullinga trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 290.

114

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system.You have to fully apply your regular brakes firstand then press the shift lever button beforeyou can shift from PARK (P) when the ignitionkey is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),ease pressure on the shift lever and push theshift lever all the way into PARK (P) as youmaintain brake application. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 121.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice or sand without damaging your transaxle,see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, orSnow on page 276.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is runningat high speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not runningat high speeds when shifting your vehicle.

115

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving withthe automatic transaxle. It provides the best fueleconomy for your vehicle. If you need more powerfor passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator all the way down.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 245.

INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also usedfor normal driving. However, it reduces vehiclespeed without using your brakes for slightdowngrades where the vehicle would otherwiseaccelerate due to steepness of grade. If constantupshifting or downshifting occurs while driving upsteep hills, this position can be used to prevent

repetitive types of shifts. You might chooseINTERMEDIATE (I) instead of DRIVE (D) whendriving on hilly, winding roads and when towinga trailer, so that there is less shifting betweengears.

LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speedmore than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actuallyusing your brakes. You can use it on very steephills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift leveris put in LOW (L), the transaxle will not shift intoLOW (L) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

116

Manual Transaxle Operation

Five-Speed

This is your vehicle’sshift pattern.

Here is how to operate your transaxle:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are goingless than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on theclutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shiftinto FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as youlet up on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift intoTHIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the sameway you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, andshift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down theclutch pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let upon the clutch pedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parkingbrake, for parking your vehicle.

117

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift,you could lose control of your vehicle.You could injure yourself or others.Do not shift down more than one gearat a time when you downshift.

Up-Shift Light

If your vehicle has amanual transaxle, youmay have an up-shiftlight. This light will showyou when to shift tothe next higher gear forthe best fuel economy.

When this light comes on, you can shift to the nexthigher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions letyou. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowlyand shift when the light comes on.

While you accelerate, it is normal for the light togo on and off if you quickly change the positionof the accelerator. Ignore the light when youdownshift.

Notice: If you skip more than one gear whenyou downshift, or if you race the enginewhen you release the clutch pedal whiledownshifting, you could damage the engine,clutch, driveshaft, or the transaxle. Do not skipgears or race the engine when downshifting.

United States Only

118

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located to the right ofthe driver’s seat.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown and pull up on the parking brake lever. If theignition is on, the brake system warning light willcome on.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up until youcan press the release button. Hold the releasebutton in as you move the brake lever all theway down.

Make sure to release the parking brake beforedriving the vehicle.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

119

Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 290.

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set theparking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingthe button on the shift lever and pushing thelever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.

120

Then, see if you can move the shift lever awayfrom PARK (P) without first pushing the button.If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too much force on theparking pawl in the transaxle. You may findit difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock,set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)properly before you leave the driver’s seat.To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle) on page 120.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need tohave another vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, then you will be able to pullthe shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shiftlock control system. You have to fully apply yourregular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition is in RUN. See AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 114.

To shift out of PARK (P):

1. Apply the regular brake pedal.

2. Then press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.

If you are still unable to shift out of PARK (P):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.

2. While holding down the brake pedal,press the shift lever button again.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.

If you still cannot move the shift lever fromPARK (P), consult your dealer.

121

Shift Interlock By-PassUse the following steps, if for some reason theshifter is not released when you apply the brake,or if service or towing requires the car to beshifted out of PARK (P) without running the engine.

1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.

2. Turn the ignition to the ACC (Accessory)position. See Ignition Positions on page 109for more information.

3. Then, move the shift lever into NEUTRAL (N).The vehicle can now be started normally.

Parking Your Vehicle(Manual Transaxle)Before leaving your vehicle, fully press the clutchpedal in, move the shift lever into REVERSE (R),and firmly apply the parking brake. Once theshift lever has been placed in REVERSE (R)with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turnthe ignition key to LOCK, remove the key,and release the clutch.

See Manual Transaxle Operation on page 117.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

122

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

123

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running.But if you ever have to, here are some thingsto know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 123.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan isat the highest setting. One place thiscan happen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 272.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle) on page 120.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 290.

124

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror with OnStar®, Compassand Temperature DisplayWhen on, an automatic dimming mirrorautomatically dims to the proper level tominimize glare from lights behind you after dark.

The mirror also includes a dual display in theupper right corner of the mirror face. The compassreading and the outside temperature will bothappear in the display at the same time.

P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turnedon automatically each time the ignition is started.To operate the automatic dimming mirror, dothe following:

1. Make sure the indicator light, located to the leftof the on/off button, is on. If it’s not, press andhold the on/off button until the light comes on,indicating that the mirror is in automaticdimming mode.

2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror functionby pressing and holding the on/off button untilthe indicator light turns off.

Temperature and Compass DisplayPress the on/off button, located to the far left, brieflyto turn the comp/temp display on or off.

If the display reads CAL, the compass needsto be calibrated. See the information followingon calibration.

125

To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, do thefollowing:

1. Press and hold the on/off button until either aflashing °F or °C appears.

2. Press the button again to change the displayto the desired unit of measurement. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity, thenew unit will be locked in and the displaywill return.

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration from timeto time.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,push in the on/off button for approximatelynine seconds or until CAL is displayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less untilthe display reads a direction, or the word CALdisappears.

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if you liveoutside of zone eight. Under certain circumstances,as during a long distance cross-country trip, it willbe necessary to adjust for compass variance.Compass variance is the difference between earth’smagnetic north and true geographic north. If notadjusted to account for compass variance, yourcompass could give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

126

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zonenumber appears in the display. The compassis now in zone mode.

3. Keep pressing the on/off button until thedesired zone number appears in the display.Release the button. After approximately fourseconds of inactivity, the new zone numberwill be locked in and the comp/temp displaywill return.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Outside Power Mirrors

The outside powermirror controls arelocated on the driver’sside of the vehiclenext to the shift lever.

Move the selector switch to the left or right tochoose the mirror to be adjusted; then press thefour-way control pad to adjust the direction ofthe mirror.

127

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can be seenfrom the driver’s seat. It also makes things appearfarther away than they really are.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide range ofsafety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance,press the OnStar® button and they can contactRoadside Service for you.

128

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms andConditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) orTTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide inyour glove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.

For more information, press the OnStar® button tospeak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

Available Services withSafe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

129

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling isfully integrated into the vehicle, and can beused with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or aBell Mobility service plan in Canada, dependingon eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speakwith an OnStar® advisor by pressing theOnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®

Owners Guide for more information (Only availablein the continental U.S.).

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 223 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be usedto dial numbers into voicemail systems, or todial phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

130

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle isin a place where OnStar® has an agreement with awireless service provider for service in that area.OnStar® service also cannot work unless you arein a place where the wireless service providerOnStar® has hired for that area has coverage,network capacity and reception when the service isneeded, and technology that is compatible with the

OnStar® service. Not all services are availableeverywhere, particularly in remote or enclosedareas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and availablein that place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of your radioto hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next to theOnStar® buttons is red, this means that your systemis not functioning properly and should be checkedby your dealer/retailer. If the light appears clear (nolight is appearing), your OnStar® subscription hasexpired. You can always press the OnStar® buttonto confirm that your OnStar® equipment is active.

131

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever.

Cupholder(s)Your vehicle has a removable cupholder linerand cupholder located inside the center consolestorage area. To access, pull the cover towardsthe rear of the vehicle. To remove the liner, pull itout of the cupholder. To replace, push the linerback in. To remove the cupholder, push the tabin near the passenger’s seat and pull straightup. To replace, slide the two tabs at the rear ofthe cupholder into the slots at the rear of thecenter console and push the cupholder gentlyinto place. There is additional storage underneaththe cupholders. There are two more cupholderslocated at rear of the center console. Pushthe button to access.

Floor Console Storage AreaYour vehicle may have a floor console storagearea. Push the button to open.

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle has a center console storage area.To access, slide the cover back towards the rearof the vehicle. It is equipped with two accessorypower outlets. One is located inside the storagearea and another hidden under the cupholders.There is a hole in the storage area for a cellphonewire to be routed through.

Cargo AreaYour vehicle has a cargo area organizer, whichis located in the rear of the vehicle. This storagespace is designed to hold small items and includesintegrated storage bins.

132

Use the following procedure to access andassemble the rear cargo organizer.

1. Pull up on the latch of the rear panel lid of thecargo organizer to open it.

2. Lift the front of the cargo organizer and foldout the end panels.

3. Turn the end panels forward and snap theminto the rear panel lid.

4. Pull the center divider out from the rearpanel lid.

133

5. Turn the center divider rearward and snap itinto the panel lid.

6. Reverse the above steps to stow the dividersand close the cargo organizer.Push firmly on the rear panel lid to engagethe latch of the organizer.

Roof Rack System

Your vehicle may be equipped with a roof racksystem. To adjust the crossrails, turn both knobson each side of the crossrail counterclockwiseuntil it moves freely. Once the crossrail is in place,turn both knobs on each of side of the crossrailclockwise until it is secure.

134

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top ofyour vehicle that is longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier — like paneling,plywood, a mattress and so forth — thewind can catch it as you drive along. Thiscan cause you to lose control. What youare carrying could be violently torn off,and this could cause you or other driversto have a collision, and of course damageyour vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, nevercarry something longer or wider than theluggage carrier on top of your vehicle.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrierthat weighs more than 100 lbs (45 kg) orhangs over the rear or sides of the vehiclemay damage your vehicle. Load cargo sothat it rests on the slats as far forwardas possible and against the side rails,making sure to fasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading YourVehicle on page 279.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you aredriving, check frequently to ensure your cargois securely fastened.

135

SunroofIf your vehicle has a sunroof, the controls tooperate it are located on the headliner above therearview mirror. The ignition must be in RUNor ACC to operate the sunroof. See IgnitionPositions on page 109.

To express-open thesunroof glass panel andsunshade, press theswitch rearwardand release it.

To stop the sunroof before it is completely open,press the switch rearward again. The sunshadecannot be closed with the sunroof open. To closethe sunroof, press forward on the switch until itstops. The sunshade must be manually closed.

To put the sunroof in the vent position, pull downon the front of the switch. Push up on the frontof the switch to close it. The sunshade mustbe manually opened and closed when thesunroof is in the vent position.

136

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 140Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 142Horn .......................................................... 142Tilt Wheel .................................................. 142Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 143Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 143Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 144Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 144Windshield Wipers ..................................... 144Windshield Washer .................................... 145Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 146Cruise Control ........................................... 146Headlamps ................................................ 149Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 150Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 151Fog Lamps ................................................ 152Interior Lamps ........................................... 152Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 152Dome Lamp .............................................. 153Entry Lighting ............................................ 153Map Lamps ............................................... 153Footwell Lamps ......................................... 153Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 154Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 154Cigarette Lighter ........................................ 155

Climate Controls ......................................... 155Climate Control System ............................. 155Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 159Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 159

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 161Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 162Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 163Trip Odometer ........................................... 163Tachometer ............................................... 164Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 164Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 165Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 165Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 166Battery Warning Light ................................ 169Up-Shift Light ............................................ 169Brake System Warning Light ..................... 170Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 171Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 172Low Traction Light ..................................... 173Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ........................................ 173Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 174Low Coolant Warning Light ....................... 174

Section 3 Instrument Panel

137

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 175Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 178Change Engine Oil Light ........................... 179Security Light ............................................ 179Reduced Engine Power Light .................... 179Highbeam On Light ................................... 180Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Indicator Light ........................................ 180Gate Ajar Light .......................................... 180Service Vehicle Soon Light ........................ 180Fuel Gage ................................................. 181Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 181

Audio System(s) ......................................... 182Setting the Time (Without Date Display) .... 183Setting the Time (With Date Display) ......... 184Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 186Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 192Radio with CD and DVD ........................... 202Using an MP3 ........................................... 202XM Radio Messages ................................. 209Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 211Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 223Radio Reception ........................................ 224Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 225Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 225Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 225XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 225

Section 3 Instrument Panel

138

✍ NOTES

139

Instrument Panel Overview

140

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Climate Control System onpage 155.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 143.

C. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Control onpage 146.

D. Horn. See Horn on page 142.E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument

Panel Cluster on page 162.F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio

Steering Wheel Controls on page 223.G. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield

Wipers on page 144.H. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See

Instrument Panel Brightness on page 152.I. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 142.J. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. See

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 166.

K. Fog Lamp Button (If Equipped) or TractionControl System Button (If Equipped). See FogLamps on page 152 or Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 238.

L. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 182.

M. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 313.

N. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 142.O. Power Mirror Control. See Outside Power

Mirrors on page 127.P. Power Window Switches. See Power Windows

on page 105.Q. Automatic Transaxle Shift Lever. See Automatic

Transaxle Operation on page 114.R. Heated Seats Buttons or Footwell Lamps

(If Equipped). See Heated Seats on page 11 orFootwell Lamps on page 153.

S. Climate Control. See Climate Control Systemon page 155.

T. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 132.

141

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn thepolice and others that you have a problem. Thefront and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals do not work.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if the key is notin the ignition switch.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on the steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelYour vehicle has a tilt wheel which allows you toadjust the steering wheel before you drive. You canraise it to the highest level to give your legs moreroom when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The lever that allowsyou to tilt the steeringwheel is located onthe left side of thesteering column.

To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and pushthe lever down. Then, move the wheel to acomfortable position and pull the lever up firmlyto lock the column in place.

142

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See

Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 143.• O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps on

page 149.• 2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changeron page 144.

• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 144.

• AUTO Automatic Headlamps. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 151.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has one upward (for right) andone downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash in thedirection of the turnor lane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete the lane change. The lever will returnby itself when you release it.As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burnedout and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all when yousignal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 409 and for burned-out bulbs.

143

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh or high beam to low, pull the turn signal leverall the way towards you. Then release it.

When the high beamsare on, this light onthe instrument panelcluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of youthat you want to pass.

To flash the high beams from low beam, pullthe turn signal/multifunction lever all the waytowards you. Then release it.

Windshield WipersBe sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper bladesbefore using them. If the wiper blades are frozen tothe windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If theblades do become damaged, install new bladesor blade inserts. See Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement on page 364.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it coolsdown. Clear away snow or ice to prevent anoverload.

United States

144

The lever on the right side of the steering columnoperates the windshield wipers. Push up orpull down on the lever to place it in one of thefollowing positions.

MIST or8 (Mist): Pull the lever down andrelease it for a single wiping cycle. The lever willreturn to its original position. For more cycles, holdthe lever down before releasing it.

OFF or9 (Off): Move the lever to this positionto turn off the wipers.

INT or& (Intermittent): Move the lever to thisposition to set a delay between wipes. To set for ashorter or longer delay between wipes, turn the

band with the arrow pointing to thenumbers (1, 2, or 3). Select 3 for the mostfrequent movement; select 1 for the least frequent.

LO or OO (Low): Move the lever to thisposition for slow, steady wiping cycles.

HI or OOOO (High): Move the lever to thisposition for rapid wiping cycles.

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

Pull the windshield wiper lever toward you tooperate the windshield wipers. Washer fluid willsquirt onto the windshield and the wipers willrun for a few cycles to clear the windshield.For more wash cycles, pull the lever towardyou and hold it there.

Canada

145

Rear Window Wiper/WasherThe band on the wiper lever with the smallerarrow operates the rear wiper/washer.

9 (Off): Turn the band to this position to turn offthe rear wiper.

Z (Rear Wiper): Turn the band with the smallerarrow to this position to turn on the rear wiper.To set for a shorter or longer delay between wipes,turn the other band with the larger arrow pointingto the numbers (1, 2, or 3). Select 3 for themost frequent movement; select 1 for the leastfrequent. The band with the arrow pointing tothe numbers (1, 2, or 3) will affect both the frontand rear wipers if they are on at the same time.

Y (Wash): Turn and hold the band in thisposition to spray washer fluid on the rear window.The rear wiper will also come on. Release theband when enough fluid has been sprayed on thewindow. The rear wiper will run a few additionaltimes after you release it.The rear window washer uses the same fluidbottle as the windshield washer. However, therear window washer will run out of fluid before thewindshield washer. If you can wash your windshieldbut not your rear window, check the fluid level.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speedof about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you couldlose control. Do not use cruise controlon slippery roads.

146

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

The cruise controlbuttons are located onthe steering wheel.

J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruisecontrol system on and off. There is a indicatorlight on the button that will come on when cruisecontrol is active.

RES+ (Resume): Press this button to resume aset speed and to accelerate the speed.

SET− (Set): Press this button to set a speed andto decrease the speed.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancelcruise control.

To set a speed do the following:

1. Press the on/off symbol to turn cruise controlon. The indicator light on the button willcome on.

2. Get to the speed you want.

3. Press the SET− button and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

When the brakes are applied, the cruise controlshuts off.

147

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brakes. Thiswill disengage the cruise control. The indicatorlight on the cruise control button will go out whenthe cruise is no longer engaged. To return tothe previously set speed, press the RES+ buttonbriefly when the vehicle has reached a speedof about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

This will take you back up to your previouslyselected speed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.

• Disengage the cruise control, but do not turnit off.

• If the cruise control system is alreadyengaged, press the RES+ button. Hold it thereuntil you get up to the speed you want, andthen release the button. To increase yourspeed in very small amounts, press the RES+button briefly and then release it. Each timeyou do this, the vehicle will go about1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlIf the cruise control system is already engaged,

• Push and hold the SET− button until you reachthe lower speed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, push theSET− button briefly. Each time you do this, youwill go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase yourspeed. When you take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle will slow down to the cruise controlspeed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work onhills depends upon your speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain the vehicle’s speed.

148

When going downhill, you may have to brakeor shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speeddown. Of course, applying the brakes endscruise control. Many drivers find this to be toomuch trouble and do not use cruise controlon steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to disengage thecruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal or clutch; whencruise control disengages, the indicator lighton the cruise control button will go out.

• Press the on/off button, this will turn off thecruise control system.

• Press the cancel button.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, your cruise control set speed memory iserased.

HeadlampsThe exterior lamp control is located on the turnsignal/multifunction lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the controlwith this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has the followingthree positions:

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to put the headlamps in automatic mode.AUTO mode will turn the exterior lamps onand off depending upon how much light isavailable outside of the vehicle.

149

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

53 (Headlamps): Turning the control to thisposition turns on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

Lamps On ReminderIf you open the driver’s door with the ignition offand the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make your low-beamheadlamps come on at a reduced brightness indaylight when the following conditions are met:

• The ignition is on,

• the exterior lamp band is in AUTO,

• the transaxle is not in PARK (P),

• the light sensor determines it is daytime, and

• the parking brake is released.

150

When the DRL are on, the low-beam headlampswill be on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps,sidemarker and other lamps will not be on.The instrument panel will not be lit up either.

When you turn the exterior lamp band tothe headlamp position, your regular headlampswill come on. The other lamps that come on withyour headlamps will also come on.

When you turn off the headlamps, the regularlamps will go off, and your low-beam headlampswill come on to the reduced brightness.

To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, move theshift lever to PARK (P). The DRL will stay off untilyou move the shift lever out of PARK (P). Tooverride the DRL on manual transaxle vehicles,you must set the parking brake while the ignitionis off and then start your vehicle. The DRL will stayoff until you release the parking brake.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, the headlampswill come on automatically.

Your vehicle has a lightsensor located on top ofthe instrument panel.Make sure it is notcovered, or theheadlamps will beon when you don’tneed them.

The system may also turn on the headlamps whendriving through a parking garage or tunnel.

151

Fog LampsIf your vehicle has this feature, use your fog lampsfor better visibility in foggy or misty conditions.

The button for your foglamps is located onthe instrument panelabove the radio.

Push the button to turn the fog lamps on or off.

When using fog lamps, the parking lamps orlow-beam headlamps must be on.

A light on the button will come on when the foglamps are on. Fog lamps will go off wheneverthe high-beam headlamps are turned on. Whenthe high-beam headlamps are turned off, thefog lamps will come on again.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Interior LampsThe liftgate lamps are located on the bottom leftand right corner of the liftgate. They will comeon when the liftgate or any door is opened. Theliftgate lamps can be controlled by the dome lampswitch. See Dome Lamp on page 153.

Instrument Panel BrightnessThis feature controls the brightness of theinstrument panel lights.

The thumbwheel forthis feature is locatedon the center of theinstrument panel.

Turn the thumbwheel to the right to brighten thelights or to the left to dim them.

152

Dome LampThe dome lamp switch has three positions.

* (Off): The lamp will not come on as long asthe switch is in this position.

1 (Automatic): The lamp will come on when adoor is opened. See Entry Lighting on page 153.

+ (On): The lamp will stay on as long asthe switch is in this position.

Entry LightingIf the dome lamp is in the automatic position,the lamps inside your vehicle will come on whenany door is opened. In addition, the lights willcome on when the remote keyless entry unlockbutton is pressed. It will stay on for 20 seconds oruntil a door is opened. After the door is openedthe lights will remain on and stay on for20 seconds after the doors are closed, or untilyou put the key in the ignition and turn the keyto RUN. The lights will then gradually dim untilit is no longer lit.

Map LampsThe lamps are located on the headliner above therearview mirror. To turn the lamps on, pressthe lens. Press the lens again to turn them off.

Footwell LampsYour vehicle may have two footwell lamps.These lights are located under the driver andpassenger seats. The switches are located onthe instrument panel under the climate controls.

There are two different colors of light that canbe selected. Press the upper part of the buttonfor blue light and press the bottom part ofthe button for amber light. Each light willilluminate the front and rear area of the seat.

153

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle is equipped with a battery saverfeature designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp is left on and theignition is turned off, the battery rundownprotection system will automatically turn the lampoff after 20 minutes. This will avoid drainingthe battery.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlets can be used toconnect electrical equipment such as a cellularphone or CB radio.

The accessory power outlets are located on theinstrument panel near the climate controls, on therear of the center console, and also inside theconsole under the cupholders.

To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not inuse, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysturn off electrical equipment when not in useand do not plug in equipment that exceeds themaximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your retailer foradditional information on the accessorypower outlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Check with your retailer beforeadding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the installation instructions included withthe equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

154

Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have a cigarette lighter. To usethe lighter, located on the instrument panel belowthe climate controls, push it in all the way and letgo. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating does not let the lighter backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating can occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle.Never put flammable items in the ashtray.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.

OperationTo change the current mode, use the right knob toselect one of the following:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

155

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs air to theinstrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets.Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to thewindshield.

When you select this mode, the system will turnrecirculation mode off and run the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside air is at or belowfreezing. Recirculation mode cannot be selectedwhile in floor mode. This helps prevent windowfogging and moisture building up within the cabin.

The right knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost mode. See “Defogging and Defrosting”later in this section.

A (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise to increasethe fan speed or counterclockwise to decreasethe fan speed. To turn the fan off, turn the left knoball the way counterclockwise. In any settingother than off, the fan will run continuously withthe ignition on. The fan must be turned on to runthe air conditioning compressor. There will be

some airflow noticeable from the various outletswhen driving, even with the fan in the off position.This is to ensure some fresh air is alwaysavailable in the vehicle.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise to increase or counterclockwiseto decrease the temperature inside your vehicle.

@ (Recirculate): Press this button to togglebetween recirculate and outside air modes. Theindicator light turns on when recirculate mode isselected. This mode can be used to preventoutside air and odors from entering your vehicleor to help heat or cool the air inside your vehiclemore quickly. Avoid using the recirculate mode onduring high periods of humidity or cool outsidetemperatures since this may result in increasedwindow fogging. If window fogging is experienced,select the defrost mode.

Recirculation mode is not available in floor, defog,or defrost modes and will shut off automatically andchange to outside air until a mode other than floor,defog, or defrost is selected. This helps preventwindow fogging and moisture building up withinthe cabin.

156

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button toturn the air conditioning system on or off. Whenthis button is pressed, an indicator light abovethe button will come on to let you know theair conditioning is activated. Air conditioningcan be selected in any mode as long as thefan is on in any speed position.

On hot days, activate the air conditioning system,select maximum fan speed and the coldesttemperature setting. Open the windows longenough to let the hot inside air escape, then closethem. This helps reduce the time it takes for yourvehicle to cool down. It also helps the system tooperate more efficiently. Adjust fan speed andtemperature setting as required to achieve comfort.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice asmall amount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climate controlsystem is used properly. There are two modes toclear fog or frost from your windshield and sidewindows. Use the defog mode to clear the windowsof fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Usethe defrost mode to remove fog or frost from thewindshield more quickly. For best results, clear allsnow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.

Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode directs air to thewindshield, side window outlets and floor outlets.When you select this mode, the system will turnrecirculation mode off and run the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside air is at or belowfreezing. Recirculation mode cannot be selectedwhile in defog mode. This helps prevent windowfogging and moisture building up within the cabin.To defog the windows faster, turn the temperatureknob clockwise to the warmest setting.

157

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield, with some air directed to the sidewindow outlets and the floor outlets. When youselect this mode, the system will turn recirculationmode off automatically and will run the airconditioning compressor unless the outside air isat or below freezing. Recirculation mode cannot beselected while in defrost mode. This helps preventwindow fogging and moisture building up withinthe cabin. To defrost the windows faster, turn thetemperature knob clockwise to the warmest setting.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in RUN.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press the button toturn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicatorlight above the button will come on to let you knowthat the rear window defogger is activated.

The rear window defogger will stay on forapproximately 15 minutes after the button ispressed, unless the ignition is turned to ACC orLOCK. If turned on again, the defogger will only runfor approximately seven minutes before turning off.The defogger can also be turned off by pressing thebutton again or by turning off the engine.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

158

Outlet AdjustmentUse the louvers located on the air outlets tochange the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the vehicle that mayblock the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Do not use any non-GM approved hooddeflectors that could adversely affect theperformance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe passenger compartment air is routed througha passenger compartment filter. The filterremoves certain particles from the air, includingpollen and dust particles. Reductions in airflow,which may occur more quickly in dusty areas,indicate that the filter needs to be replaced.

The filter should be replaced as part of routinescheduled maintenance. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 420 for replacementintervals. To find out what type of filter to use,see Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 434.

The passenger compartment air filter can beaccessed from under the hood.

1. Remove the pushpins from the airfilter access panel.

2. Remove the air filter access panel.

159

3. Remove the air filter from the housing bypressing the tab on the inboard side ofthe housing.

4. Remove the filter by sliding it out ofthe housing.

5. Install the new air filter.When installing a new air filter make sure theAIR FLOW arrow is pointing rearward.

6. Reinstall the air filter access panel.

7. Reinstall the air filter access panel push pins.

160

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages onyour vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to the warning lights and gages could alsosave you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or isa problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As the details show on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you startthe engine just to let you know they are working.If you are familiar with this section, you shouldnot be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly and even dangerous.So please get to know your vehicle’s warninglights and gages. They can be a big help.

161

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will knowhow fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need toknow to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

162

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometers perhour (km/h).

Your odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven, in either miles or kilometers.

Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.If ERROR is displayed, this indicates someonehas probably tampered with the odometer and thereading may not be accurate. You may wonderwhat happens if your vehicle needs a newodometer installed. The new one can be set to themileage total of the old odometer, then that will bedone. If not, it will be set at zero and a label mustbe put on the driver’s door to show the old mileagereading when the new odometer was installed.If the mileage is unknown, the label should thenindicate “previous mileage unknown”.

Trip OdometerYour trip odometer is located on the instrumentpanel and shows how far your vehicle has beendriven since the trip odometer was last reset.To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and holdthe trip/reset button on the speedometer for abouttwo seconds. Press the trip/reset button to switchbetween the trip odometer and odometer.

163

Tachometer

The tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine above6,900 rpm, your vehicle could be damaged,and the damages would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not operate the engine with thetachometer above 6,900 rpm.

Notice: For the VUE Redline, if you operatethe engine with the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, your vehicle could be damaged,and the damages would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not operate the engine withthe tachometer in the shaded warning area.

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, achime will come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts, unless thedriver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for several seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

This chime and light will be repeated if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

164

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 82 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and lightwill be repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel cluster, which shows theairbag symbol. The system checks the airbag’selectrical system for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electrical problem.The system check includes the airbag sensor,the airbag modules, the wiring and the crashsensing and diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system, see AirbagSystem on page 71.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

165

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for afew seconds when you turn the ignition key toRUN. If the light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there isa problem.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.


166

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

If your vehicle has a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,a label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

167

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat thatwill accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,never put a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the right front passenger seat unless thepassenger airbag status indicator shows offand the airbag is off. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be transportedin vehicles with a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,whenever possible.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit onthe airbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 82 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 165.

168

Battery Warning Light

The battery warning lightwill come on briefly as acheck, when you turn onthe ignition. Then itshould go out when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on when you start yourvehicle, have your vehicle serviced right away. Thiscondition may indicate your battery warning light isnot functioning properly. If this light comes on whileyou are driving, be sure to turn off accessories suchas the radio and climate control system. Have yourvehicle serviced right away.

Up-Shift LightYour vehicle may have an up-shift light. Whenthis light comes on, you should shift to thenext higher gear if weather, road, and trafficconditions allow you to.

This light is located inyour instrument panelcluster under yourtemperature gage.

See Manual Transaxle Operation on page 117 formore information.

United States Only

169

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, theother part can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.If the brake system warning light comes on,there is a brake problem. Have your brake systeminspected right away.

The brake light is located in the instrumentpanel cluster.This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready towarn you if there is a problem.When the ignition is on, the brake light will comeon when you set your parking brake. The lightwill stay on if your parking brake does not release

fully. A chime will also sound if the parking brakeis not fully released and the vehicle is moving.If it stays on after your parking brake is fullyreleased, it means you have a brake problem.The brake light will also come on to indicate alow brake fluid level. See Brakes on page 343for more information.If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed for service. SeeTowing Your Vehicle on page 284.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.


170

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning LightIf your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, the anti-lockbrake system (ABS) warning light will comeon briefly, as a check, when you start your vehicle.If it does not, have your vehicle serviced so thatthe light works properly when it needs to.

The ABS light is locatedin the instrument panelcluster, to the left ofthe engine coolanttemperature gage.

If the light stays on longer than a few secondsafter you start your engine, or comes on and stayson while you are driving, try resetting the system.

To reset the system, do the following:

1. If you are driving, pull over when it is safeto do so.

2. Be sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the ignition.

4. Then restart the engine.

If the light remains on after resetting the systemor comes on again while driving, your vehicleneeds service. If the ABS light is on, but theregular brake system warning light is not on, theanti-lock brakes are not working properly, butthe regular brakes are still functioning. Have yourvehicle serviced right away. If both brake lightsare on, you do not have anti-lock brakes, andthere’s a problem with your regular brakes as well.Have your vehicle towed for service. See TowingYour Vehicle on page 284.

The anti-lock brake system warning light shouldcome on briefly when you turn the ignition key toRUN. If the light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem.

171

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

Your vehicle may havea traction control systemwarning light. Thetraction control systemwarning light maycome on for thefollowing reasons:

• For vehicles equipped with the 2.2L L4engine, turn the system off by pressingthe traction control button located on theinstrument panel above the audio system.The warning light will come on and stay on.To turn the system back on, press thebutton again. The warning light should go off.See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 238 for more information.

• For vehicles equipped with the3.5L V6 engine, the traction control systemwill be turned off when the shift lever isin REVERSE (R) or LOW (L). The tractioncontrol system warning light will be displayedon the instrument panel. The tractioncontrol system can be activated again byselecting DRIVE (D) or INTERMEDIATE (I).

• If there is an engine-related and brake systemproblem that is specifically related to tractioncontrol, the traction control system willturn off and the warning light will come on.

If the traction control system warning light comes onand stays on for an extended period of time whenthe system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

172

Low Traction LightIf your vehicle has theTraction Control System(TCS), this light willcome on when thesystem is limitingwheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal. The roads may be slippery if thislight comes on. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The light will stay on for a few seconds after thesystem stops limiting wheel spin. This light shouldalso come on for a few seconds when you start yourvehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight will come onwhen the enginehas overheated.

If this happens you should pull over and seeEngine Overheating on page 334 for moreinformation.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on could cause yourvehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 334. Your vehicle could be damaged,and it might not be covered by your warranty.Never drive with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on.

This light will come on and flash when thetemperature of the automatic transmission fluid istoo high. If this happens you should pull over,shift into PARK (P) and let the engine idle untilthe light goes out.

This light will also come on briefly whenstarting your vehicle. If it does not, haveyour vehicle serviced.

173

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage displays thetemperature of thevehicle’s engine.

If the indicator needle moves into the shadedarea, the engine is too hot. The engine coolanttemperature warning light will also come on whenthe engine has overheated. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 173 for moreinformation.

If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions, and the engine coolanttemperature warning light comes on, you shouldpull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off theengine as soon as possible.

Low Coolant Warning Light

This light comes onbriefly when you turnyour ignition on.

If this light comes on and stays on, the coolant levelin your vehicle is low. If the light is on along withan overheat warning, you may have a seriousoverheating problem. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 174.

Notice: Driving with the low coolant warninglight on could cause your vehicle to overheat.See “Engine Overheating” under EngineCoolant on page 331. Your vehicle could bedamaged and the damages might not becovered by your warranty.

See Engine Coolant on page 331 for informationon what to do. Your vehicle should be serviced assoon as possible.

174

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle hasa computer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, the emission controlsmight not work as well, your vehicle’s fueleconomy might not be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. This could leadto costly repairs that might not be covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairsnot covered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 304.

175

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on andthe engine is not running. If the light doesnot come on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosisand service may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your retailer for serviceas soon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 309.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn the light off.

176

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 306. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.(These conditions may go away once the engineis warmed up.) This will be detected by thesystem and cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your retailer can check the vehicle.Your retailer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know in orderto help your vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection.This can happen if you have recently replacedyour battery or if your battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.This may take several days of routine driving. If youhave done this and your vehicle still does not passthe inspection for lack of OBD system readiness,your retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.

177

Oil Pressure Light

If you have a lowengine oil pressureproblem, this lightwill stay on after youstart your engine,or come on when youare driving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil. The engine could be low on oil,or could have some other oil problem. Have itfixed immediately.

The oil light may also come on when the ignitionis on but the engine is not running, the lightwill come on as a test to show you it is working,but the light will go out when you turn theignition to START. If it does not come on withthe ignition on, you may have a problem with thefuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

178

Change Engine Oil Light

If this light comes on, itmeans that service isrequired for your vehicle.

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 420 andEngine Oil on page 318 for more information.

After having the oil changed you will need toreset the light. See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 323 for more information.

Security Light

Your vehicle hasa Passlock®

theft-deterrentsystem.

With this system, the security light will flash asyou open the door if your ignition is off.

This light will come on briefly when the vehicle isturned on.

For more information, see Passlock® on page 108.

Reduced Engine Power LightThis light will come onbriefly when you startthe engine.

This light, along with the service engine soon lightwill be displayed when a noticeable reduction inthe vehicle’s performance may occur. Stopthe vehicle and turn off the ignition. Wait for10 seconds and restart your vehicle. This maycorrect the condition.

The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speedwhen the reduced engine power light is onbut acceleration and speed may be reduced.The performance may be reduced until the nexttime you drive your vehicle. If this light stayson, see your retailer as soon as possiblefor diagnosis and repair.

179

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 144 for more information.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Indicator Light

This light is located onthe instrument panelcluster. It comeson whenever theDaytime RunningLamps are on.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 150for further information.

Gate Ajar Light

If this light comes on,your liftgate is notcompletely closed.Driving with the liftgateopen can causecarbon monoxide (CO)to enter the vehicle.

See Engine Exhaust on page 123 for moreinformation.

Service Vehicle Soon Light

This light will come on ifa condition exists thatmay require thevehicle to be takenin for service.

If the light comes on, take your vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.

180

Fuel GageWhen the ignition is on,the fuel gage tells youabout how muchfuel you have left inyour tank.

When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel lightwill come on. You still have a little fuel left, butyou should get more soon. See Low Fuel WarningLight on page 181 for more information.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these mean a condition exists withyour fuel gage:

• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gagemay have indicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less thanhalf the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn acorner or speed up.

• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilizeafter the ignition is turned on, and will goback to empty when you turn the ignition off.

For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 414.

Low Fuel Warning LightThe light next to the fuelgage will come onbriefly when you arestarting the engine.

This light also comes on when the fuel tank is lowon fuel. When you add fuel the light should gooff. If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.

181

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 230. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.

182

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer/retailer. Also, checkfederal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere withthe operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,or other systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Setting the Time(Without Date Display)If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with asingle CD player and preset buttons numberedone through six, the radio has a clock buttonfor setting the time. You can set the timeby following these steps:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) orRUN. Press the power knob, located in thecenter of the radio, to turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button until the hour numbersbegin flashing on the display. Press theclock button a second time and the minutenumbers begin flashing on the display.

3. While either the hour or the minute numbersare flashing, turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decreasethe time.

183

4. Press the clock button again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set the currentlydisplayed time; otherwise, the flashing stopsafter five seconds and the current timedisplayed will be automatically set.

To change the time default setting from 12 hourto 24 hour, press the clock button and thenthe pushbutton located under the forward arrowlabel. Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,press the pushbutton located under the desiredoption to select the default. Press the clock buttonagain to apply the selected default, or let thescreen time out.

Setting the Time (With Date Display)If your vehicle has a radio with a single CDplayer, the radio has a clock button for settingthe time and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, andyear) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under anyone of the labels that you want to change.Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,the time or the date if selected, increasesby one.

• Another way to increase the time or date,is to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease the time or date, press theleft SEEK arrow or REV (reverse) button,or turn the tune knob, located on the upperright side of the radio.

The date does not automatically display. To seethe date press the clock button while the radiois on. The date with display times out after a fewseconds and goes back to the normal radioand time display.

If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio has a MENU button instead ofthe clock button to set the time and date.

184

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption is displayed.

3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under anyone of the labels that you want to change.Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,the time or the date if selected, increasesby one.

• Another way to increase the time or date,is to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease the time or date, press the leftSEEK arrow or REV (reverse) button, orturn the tune knob, located on theupper right side of the radio.

The date does not automatically display. To seethe date press the MENU button and then theclock button while the radio is on. The date withdisplay times out after a few seconds andgoes back to the normal radio and time display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default settingfrom month/day/year to day/month/year, followthese instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrowlabel. Once the time 12H and 24H, andthe date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock or MENU button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

185

Radio with CD (Base)

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

The radio plays at the previous volume settingwhenever the radio is turned on. The volumecan still be manually adjusted by using thevolume knob.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2 or AM. The display shows the selection.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

186

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:1. Turn the radio on.2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.3. Tune in the desired station.4. Press and hold one of the six numbered

pushbuttons for three seconds until a beepsounds. When that pushbutton is pressed andreleased, the station that was set, returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for eachpushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bassor treble, press the tune knob or bass/treblepushbutton until the desired tone control labeldisplays. Turn the tune knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thesetting. The setting can also be adjusted bypressing either the SEEK, FWD (forward), or REV(reverse) buttons. The display shows the currentbass or treble level. If a station’s frequency is weakor has static, decrease the treble.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press theEQ button until Manual displays or start tomanually adjust the bass or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust thebalance or fade, press this button or the tune knobuntil the desired speaker control label displays.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the setting. The setting can also beadjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD,or REV buttons.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, the radio has not beenconfigured properly and your vehicle must bereturned to your retailer for service.

187

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appearson the radio display. As each new track startsto play, the track number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD

is damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 225 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more thanone CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratched or damagedCDs, the CD player could be damaged. Whileusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

188

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectthe CD. If the CD is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD automatically pulls back intothe player.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow isheld or pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Release this buttonto resume playing the track. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, the CDtracks can be listened to in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, do the following:

1. To play tracks from the CD in randomorder, press the RDM pushbutton. The randomicon displays.

2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play. The random icon displays.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entireCD can be repeated.

189

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track, press and release theRPT button. An arrow symbol displays.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD, PRESS and hold the RPTbutton for a few seconds. An arrow symboldisplays. Press RPT again to turn off repeatplay. When repeat is off, the symbol no longerdisplays.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the track number, elapsed time ofthe track, and the time. When the ignition is off,press this button to display the time.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio.

The CD icon and track number displays while aCD is in the player. Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches for an auxiliaryinput device such as a portable audio player.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/orthe CD ejects, it could be for one of the followingreasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD-R.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your retailer when reporting theproblem.

190

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.However, an external audio device such asan iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CDchanger, or cassette tape player, etc. can beconnected to the auxiliary input jack for use asanother source for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 230 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s frontauxiliary input jack. While a device is connected,press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playingaudio from the device over the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise toincrease or counterclockwise to decrease thevolume of the portable player. Additional volumeadjustments from the portable device mightbe needed if the volume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or power it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, No Input Device Found displays.

191

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. While the radiois tuned to an FM-RDS station, the stationname or call letters display. In rare cases, a radiostation can broadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Radio with CD shown, Radio withSix-Disc CD (MP3) similar

192

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise to increase orcounterclockwise to decrease the volume.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display showsthe selection.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3song. A choice of additional information such as:Channel, Song, Artist, CAT can display. Continuepressing the information button to highlight thedesired label, or press the pushbutton positionedunder any one of the labels and the informationabout that label displays.

When information is not available, No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune toyour favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls, if your vehiclehas them. See Defensive Driving on page 230.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.

193

Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. When that pushbuttonis pressed and released, the station that wasset, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,to return to the original main radio screenshowing the radio station frequency labels andto begin the process of programming yourfavorites for the chosen amount of numberedpages.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tuneknob until the tone control labels display. Continuepressing to highlight the desired label, or press thepushbutton positioned under the desired label.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the highlighted setting. The highlightedsetting can also be adjusted by pressing either theSEEK, FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) buttonuntil the desired levels are obtained. If a station’sfrequency is weak, or has static, decrease thetreble.

194

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for morethan two seconds. A beep sounds and the leveladjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controlsto the middle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual displays or start to manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance orfade, press the tune knob until the speaker controllabels display. Continue pressing to highlight thedesired label, or press the pushbutton positionedunder the desired label. Turn the tune knobclockwise or counterclockwise to adjust thehighlighted setting. The highlighted setting can alsobe adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD, orREV button until the desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.

195

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency displays. Press the CAT button todisplay the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated withthat category.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttonsbelow the right or left arrows displayed,or press the right or left SEEK buttons to goto the next or previous XM™ station within theselected category.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or by pressingthe pushbutton under the Restore All label.

Categories cannot be removed or added while thevehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 209 later in thissection for further detail.

196

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, the radio has not beenconfigured properly and your vehicle must bereturned to your retailer for service.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. A beep sounds and LoadAll Discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. While the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays onthe CD. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

197

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 225 for more information.



Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more thanone CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratched or damagedCDs, the CD player could be damaged. Whileusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.


Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,the CD automatically pulls back into the player andbegins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theeject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

198

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrowis held, or pressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward or forward through thetracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Release this buttonto resume playing the track. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be listened to in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in asix-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

• To play the tracks from the CD in randomorder, press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the pushbutton again toturn off random play.

• To play tracks from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, pressthe pushbutton positioned under theRDM label until Randomize All Discs displays.Press the same pushbutton again to turnoff random play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand track number displays when a CD is inthe player.

199

Your radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.An external audio device such as a portable audioplayer can be connected to the auxiliary inputjack for use as another source for playing CDs.

Press the CD/AUX button again and the systembegins playing audio from the connected portableaudio player. If a portable audio player is notconnected, No Input Device Found displays.

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have theMP3 feature. If it has this feature, it is capableof playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For moreinformation on how to play an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 202 laterin this section.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/orthe CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it downand provide it to your retailer when reportingthe problem.

200

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.However, an external audio device such asan iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CDchanger, or cassette tape player, etc. can beconnected to the auxiliary input jack for use asanother source for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 230 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s frontauxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playingaudio from the device over the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise toincrease or counterclockwise to decrease thevolume of the portable player. Additional volumeadjustments might be needed from the portabledevice if the volume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or power it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portableaudio player. If a portable audio player is notconnected, No Input Device Found displays.

201

Radio with CD and DVD

If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) system, the vehicle has a radio that acceptseither CD audio or DVD video.

The radio with CD and DVD is very similar tothe radio with CD (Base) or the radio withCD (MP3). If you are interested in learning moreabout the radio and CD audio functions forthis type of radio system, see Radio with CD(Base) on page 186 or Radio with CD (MP3)on page 192 earlier in this section for moreinformation.

If you are interested in learning more about theDVD functions of this radio system, see Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 211 later in thissection for more information.

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recordedwith the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.Song title, artist name, and album are available fordisplay by the radio when recorded using ID3tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3files. By default the radio reads only theuncompressed audio and ignore the MP3 files.Pressing the CAT (category) button togglesbetween compressed and uncompressedaudio format.

202

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• The CD player is able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions mightnot work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists can cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlistsor sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc cancause the disc not to function inthe player.

Change playlists by using the previous and nextfolder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.You can also play an MP3 CD-R that was recordedusing no file folders. If a CD-R contains more thanthe maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files, the player lets you access and navigateup to the maximum, but all items over the maximumare not accessible.

203

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as afolder. If the root directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. Allfiles contained directly under the root directoryare accessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files,the files are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions do not display ona CD-R that was recorded without folders orplaylists. When displaying the name of thefolder the radio displays ROOT.

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder down andthe folder up buttons searches playlists (Px) firstand then go to the root folder. When the radiodisplays the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last trackof the last folder has been played, playcontinues from the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

204

File System and NamingThe song name that is displayed is the songname that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the songname is not present in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the last page of textand the extension of the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CDPlayer), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-Rshould begin playing.

If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD-R inthe player it stays in the player. When youturn on the ignition or radio, the CD-R starts toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded inthe same manner.

205

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 225 for more information.


Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at atime, or an attempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.



Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currentlyplaying, press and release this button. A beepsounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the discis ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-Rcan be removed. If the CD-R is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD-R automatically pullsback into the player and begins playing. For theSix-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject buttonfor two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

206

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more than tenseconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrowto go to the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow isheld or pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through MP3 files onthe CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Soundis heard at a reduced volume. Release this buttonto resume playing the file. The elapsed time of thefile displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3files on the CD-R can be listened to in random,rather than sequential order, on one CD-Ror all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random,do one of the following:

1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R you arelistening to in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Random Current Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

207

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in orderby artist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The player scansthe disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3tag information. It can take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the number of MP3 filesrecorded to the CD-R. The radio can begin playingwhile it is scanning the disc in the background.When the scan is finished, the CD-R beginsplaying again.

Once the disc has been scanned, the playerdefaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist. Thecurrent artist playing is shown on the second line ofthe display between the arrows. Once all songs bythat artist are played, the player moves to the nextartist in alphabetical order on the CD-R and beginplaying MP3 files by that artist. To listen to MP3files by another artist, press the pushbutton locatedbelow either arrow button. The CD goes to the nextor previous artist in alphabetical order. Continuepressing either button until the desired artist isdisplayed.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, push one of thebuttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the album nameis displayed on the second line between the arrowsand songs from the current album begins to play.Once all songs from that album are played, theplayer moves to the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R and begins playing MP3 filesfrom that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbuttonbelow the Back label to return to normal MP3playback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays while a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Aux Input Device displays.

208

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updatingencryption code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and noaction is required. This process should take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move intoan open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune toanother channel.

Channel Unavail Channel nolonger available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tuneto another station. If this station was one of the presets,choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

209

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No CAT Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM TheftLocked Theftlock® active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle could have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messageappears after having your vehicle serviced, check withyour retailer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the XM™Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your retailer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your retailer.

XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your retailer.

210

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have a DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. The RSE systemworks with the vehicle’s audio system and includesa radio that accepts CD audio or DVD video, avideo display screen, two sets of wirelessheadphones, and a remote control.

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengersonly. The driver cannot safely view the videoscreen while driving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weather conditions theRSE system might not work until the temperatureis within the operating range. The operatingrange for the RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C)or below 140°F (60°C). If the temperature ofyour vehicle is outside of this range, heat or coolthe vehicle until the temperature is within theoperating range of the RSE system.

HeadphonesThe RSE includes two sets of wirelessheadphones that are only dedicated to thissystem. These headphones are used to listento the radio with CD and DVD or an auxiliarydevice connected to the RCA jacks. The wirelessheadphones have an ON/OFF switch and avolume control.

To use the headphones, turn the switch to ON.An indicator light on the headphones comes on.If the light does not come on, the batteriesmight need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section for moreinformation. Switch the headphones to OFFwhen not in use.

The infrared transmitters are located in the displaybelow the video screen. The headphones shutoff automatically to save the battery power if theDVD system is shut off or if the headphonesare out of range of the transmitters for more thanthree minutes. If you move too far forward orstep out of the vehicle, the headphones lose theaudio signal.

211

To adjust the volume on the headphones, use thevolume control located on the right side.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Slide open the battery door located on the leftside of the headphones.

2. Replace the two AAA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram on theinside of the battery compartment.

3. Slide the battery door shut.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

Stereo RCA Jacks

The RCA jacks are located behind the video screenon the overhead console. The RCA jacks allowaudio or video signals to be connected from anauxiliary device such as a camcorder or a videogame unit to the RSE. Adapter connectors orcables might be required to connect the auxiliarydevice to the RCA jacks. Refer to themanufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.

212

The RCA jacks are color coded to match typicalhome entertainment system equipment. The yellowjack (right) is for the video input. The white jack(middle) is for the left audio input. The red jack (left)is for the right audio input. The red connector mustalways be used in order for the DVD system torecognize that an external source is plugged in.With the radio on, the screen automaticallyswitches to the rear auxiliary input when thered connector cable is inserted.Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by theradio system.To use the auxiliary function, connect a camcorderor a video game unit to the RCA jacks and turn onthe auxiliary device. To view a DVD, insert the DVDinto the CD/DVD loading slot on the radio. Thesystem automatically switches to DVD and starts toplay. To switch between the auxiliary device andthe DVD, press the DVD/AUX button on the radiofaceplate or the SRCE (source) button on theremote control. See “DVD Player” and “RemoteControl” later in this section for more information.

Audio OutputOnly one audio source can be heard through thespeakers at one time.

Press the power button to turn the radio on.The radio can be heard through all of thevehicle speakers.

When a DVD is inserted, playback is heardthrough the vehicle speakers and headphones.

Front seat passengers can listen to the radioby pressing the BAND button to select AM, FM orXM™ (if equipped). The rear seat speakers aremuted for radio listening, and the DVD playsthrough the headphones (RSE Mode).

When RCA jacks are connected, the rear speakersare muted. The rear seat passengers are ableto hear audio from the auxiliary device through thewireless headphones. The front seat passengersare able to listen to the radio through the frontspeakers, by pressing the BAND button to selectAM, FM, or XM (if equipped), or listen to a CDthat is inserted into the radio.

If a playback device is plugged into the radio’sauxiliary input jack, the device can be heardthrough all of the vehicle speakers. In RSE modethe playback device is only heard through thefront speakers.

213

Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the overheadconsole.

To use the video screen, do the following:

1. Push forward on the release button located onthe DVD display console.

2. Pull the screen down, away from you, andadjust its position as desired.

When the video screen is not in use, push it upinto its locked position.

If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised toits locked position, the screen shuts off, butthe DVD continues to play through the previousaudio or video source.

The video screen contains the transmitters for thewireless headphones and the receivers for theremote control. If the screen is in the closedposition, the signals are not available for theoperation of the headphones or the remote control.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

DVD Player

The DVD player is part of the radio and is locatedin the center of the instrument panel.

The DVD player is controlled by the buttons onthe radio faceplate, or by the buttons on theremote control. See “Remote Control” later in thissection for more information.

214

The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs thatare authorized for use in the United States andCanada (Region Code 1). The DVD region code isprinted on the jacket of most DVDs. Most audioCDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s can also beplayed by the radio with CD and DVD.

If an error message displays on the video screenor the radio, see “DVD Player Error Messages”later in this section.

Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.An external audio device such as an iPod,MP3 player, or cassette player can be connectedto the auxiliary input jack for use as anothersource for audio listening.

DVD Player ButtonsTo learn about the DVD functions for this typeof radio system, read the following for moreinformation on the DVD player.

DVD/AUX (Auxiliary): While a DVD is playing,press this button to switch between front auxiliaryand RSE.

To listen to a DVD through the headphones, pressthis button.

While a CD is playing, press this button to switchbetween playing a CD or the front auxiliary, if not inRSE mode. If the system is in RSE mode, press thepower button on the remote control first, to listen tothe CD through the headphones, while the frontpassengers listen to the front auxiliary.

O (Power): Press this knob to turn theradio/DVD player on. Turn this knob clockwiseto or counterclockwise to increase or decreasethe volume. A single press turns the radiooff, a quick double press turns off the entireradio and rear seat entertainment system.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to change tracks on aCD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station, or tochange clock or date settings, while in the clockor date setting mode. See Setting the Time(Without Date Display) on page 183 or Settingthe Time (With Date Display) on page 184 formore information.

215

© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press thisbutton to return to the start of the current trackor chapter. Press this button again to go tothe previous track or chapter. This button mightnot work while the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

¨ SEEK (Next Track/Chapter): Press thisbutton to advance to the beginning of the nexttrack or chapter. This button might not work whilethe DVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

s REV (Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD or CD, five times the normalspeed. The radio displays the elapsed time whilein fast reverse. To stop fast reversing, pressthis button again. This button might not work whilethe DVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button tofast forward the DVD or CD. The radio displaysthe elapsed time and fast forwards five timesthe normal speed. To stop fast forwarding, pressthis button again. This button might not work whilethe DVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

Some DVDs begins playing after the previews havefinished, although there could be a delay of up to30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing themovie automatically, press the pushbutton locatedunder the play/pause symbol tag displayed on theradio. If the DVD still does not play, refer to theon-screen instructions, if available.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD orCD. If a DVD or CD is ejected, but not removed,the player automatically pulls it back in after15 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playingthe movie automatically, press the pushbuttonlocated under the play symbol tag displayed on theradio. If the DVD still does not play, refer to theon-screen instructions (if available).

216

DVD Display ButtonsOnce a DVD is inserted, a screen display menushows several tag options for DVD playing. Pressthe pushbuttons located under any desired tagoption during DVD playback. See the tag optionslisted below for more information:

r /j (Play/Pause): Press either the play orpause icon displayed on the radio system,to toggle between pausing or restarting playbackof a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing ondisplay, the system is in pause mode. If the pauseicon is showing on display, the system is inplayback mode.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoices that are highlighted in any menu.

y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVDmenu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the pushbuttons located under thenavigation arrows to navigate the cursor throughthe DVD menu. After making a selection press theenter button. This button only operates whenusing a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press this button to displaydirectional arrows for navigating throughthe menus.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button operates only when a DVD is playingand a menu is active.

Playing a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the labelside up, into the loading slot. The player startsloading the disc into the system and display“Loading Disc” on the video screen. At the sametime, the radio displays a softkey menu of options.The first option tag located on the left-hand side ofthe menu options, displays alternately the play orpause symbols. This indicates the system is loadingthe disc or is not yet ready to accept a play buttonpress. The displayed symbol arrow remains untilthe disc is completely loaded or Promos andCopyright information has ended. The time can varydepending on the discs media type and format.Once the DVD is loaded into the system, a pauseicon displays instead of the forward arrow. Thisindicates the system is in play mode, and the discautomatically starts playback.

217

Loading a disc into the system usually takesapproximately 30 seconds for playback to begin.

If a DVD is already in the radio, press theplay/pause button on the remote control, or pressthe pushbutton located under the play symboltag displayed on the radio to start playing the disc,when the DVD system is active.

The DVD player might not accept some paperlabeled media.

The DVD player/video screen can only be turnedon by pressing the power button on the remotecontrol or by inserting a DVD.

Playing an MP3 CDThe CD player has the ability to recognize up to255 folders, and up to 255 files per folder toa maximum of 512 total MP3 selections on a CD.Mixed media CD’s are not supported.

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo turn the RSE system off, press the powerbutton twice on the radio.

To turn the RSE system back on again, press thepower button on the radio, then press the DVD/AUXbutton. This brings up the softkey menu displayedon the radio. Press the play/pause icon to beginplayback from where it had previously stopped.

To stop playing a DVD without turning off thesystem, press the stop button on the remotecontrol, or press the pushbutton located under thestop or the play/pause symbol tags displayedon the radio.

To resume DVD playback, press the play/pausebutton on the remote control, or press thepushbutton located under the play/pause symboltag displayed on the radio. The DVD should resumeplay from where it last stopped if the disc has notbeen ejected and the stop button has not beenpressed twice on the remote control. If the disc hasbeen ejected or the stop button has been pressedtwice on the remote control, the disc resumesplaying at the beginning of the disc.

218

Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button on the radio to eject the disc.If a disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed,the radio reloads the disc after a short period oftime. The disc is stored in the radio. The radio doesnot resume play of the disc automatically.

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the transmitterwindow below the video screen and press thedesired button. Direct sunlight or very bright lightcould affect the ability of the RSE transmitter toreceive signals from the remote control. If theremote control does not seem to be working, thebatteries might need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section. Objects blockingthe line of sight could also affect the function of theremote control.

The DVD player can only be turned on by pressingthe DVD/AUX button on the radio.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hotarea or in direct sunlight can damage it,and the repairs will not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control stored in acool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button to turn the RSEscreen on and off (also powers up the DVD playerif a disc is loaded).

P (Illumination): Press this button to turn theremote control backlight on. The backlighttimes out after seven to ten seconds if no otherbutton is pressed while the backlight is on.

v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD tothe main menu of the DVD.

219

y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection press the enter button.This button only operates when using a DVD.

n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Usethe arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoices that are highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjustthe color, tint, brightness, contrast, and displaymode (normal, full, or zoom). The dynamic rangecompression feature can be used to reduceloud audio and increase low audio produced bysome DVDs.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button operates only when a DVD is playingand a menu is active.

e (Audio): Press this button to display a menuthat only appears when a DVD is playing. Theformat and content of this function varies foreach disc.

{ (Subtitle): Press this button to turn onsubtitles and to move through subtitle optionswhen a DVD is playing. The format and content ofthis function varies for each disc.

| (Camera Angle): Press this button tochange camera angles on DVDs that have thisfeature when a DVD is playing. The formatand content of this function varies for each disc.

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing,press this button again. This button might not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the DVD player and an auxiliary source.

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding,press this button again. This button might not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press thisbutton twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.

220

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playof a DVD or CD. Press this button while aDVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press this buttonagain to continue playing the DVD.

While the DVD is playing, press the pause buttonthen press the fast forward button. The DVDcontinues playing in a slow play mode. To cancelslow play mode, press the play/pause button.

t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this buttonto return to the start of the current track or chapter.Press this button again to go to the previoustrack or chapter. This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button toadvance to the beginning of the next trackor chapter. This button might not work when theDVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numerickeypad provides the capability of direct chapter,title, and track number selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button, within three secondsafter entering a numeric selection to clear allnumeric inputs.

}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press the button, toselect chapter, title, and track numbers greaterthan nine. Press this button before inputtingthe number.

Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the battery compartment doorlocated on the bottom of the remote control.

2. Replace the two AA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram onthe inside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery door securely.

If the remote control is to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

221

DVD Player Error MessagesThe video screen could display one ofthe following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displayswhen there are disc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This message displays, if thedisc is inserted with the disc label wrong sideup, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message displays, if thedisc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if nodisc is present when the EJECT or DVD/AUXbutton is pressed on the radio.

DVD DistortionVideo distortion could occur when operatingcellular phones, scanners, CB radios, GlobalPosition Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobilefax, or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or nearthe vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the DVD PlayerWhen cleaning the outside DVD faceplate andbuttons, use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use only aclean cloth dampened with clean water. Use carewhen directly touching or cleaning the screen,as damage could result.

222

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio controlscan be adjusted at thesteering wheel. Theyinclude the following:

x w: Press the up or the down arrow to go tothe next or to the previous radio station andstay there. The radio seeks stations only with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until SCAN displays and a beepsounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next station. Presseither arrow again to stop scanning.

While a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track.

To scan the current CD, press and hold eitherup or down arrow for more than two seconds.The CD goes to the next track, plays thefirst 10 seconds, then goes to the next track.Press either up or down arrow again to stopscanning.

To scan all of the CDs loaded, press andhold either up or down arrow for more thanfour seconds. The CD goes to the next CD, playsthe first 10 seconds of each track, then goes tothe next CD. Press either up or down arrow againto stop scanning.

+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button toincrease or to decrease the volume.

g (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.Press this button again, to turn the sound on.

223

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static during normalradio reception can occur if items such ascellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devices areplugged into the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stations boostthe power levels during the day, and then reducethese levels during the night. Static can also occurwhen things like storms and power lines interferewith radio reception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels could causeloss of XM signal for a period of time. Theradio might display NO XM SIGNAL to indicateinterference.

224

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or not at all. If thesurface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free clothor dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.Make sure the wiping process starts from the centerto the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the antenna base. If tightening isrequired, tighten by hand.

XM™ Satellite RadioAntenna SystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

A vehicle with a sunroof might not get thebest performance from the XM™ system if thesunroof is open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

225

✍ NOTES

226

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 228Driver Behavior ......................................... 228Driving Environment .................................. 229Vehicle Design .......................................... 229Defensive Driving ...................................... 230Drunken Driving ........................................ 231Control of a Vehicle .................................. 234Braking ...................................................... 234Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 235Braking in Emergencies ............................. 237Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 238All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .................. 239Steering .................................................... 240Off-Road Recovery .................................... 243Passing ..................................................... 243Loss of Control .......................................... 245Off-Road Driving ........................................ 247

Driving at Night ......................................... 262Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 264City Driving ............................................... 267Freeway Driving ........................................ 268Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 269Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 270Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 270Winter Driving ........................................... 272If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 276Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 277Recovery Hook .......................................... 277Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 279

Towing ........................................................ 284Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 284Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 285Towing a Trailer ........................................ 290

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

227

Your Driving, the Road, andYour VehicleWhenever we drive, we are taking on animportant responsibility. This is true for anymotor vehicle — passenger car, van, truck, sportutility. Driver behavior, the driving environment,and the vehicle’s design all affect how wella vehicle performs. But statistics show that themost important factor, by far, is how we drive.

Knowing how these three factors work togethercan help you understand how your vehiclehandles and what you can do to avoid manytypes of crashes, including a rollover crash.

Driver BehaviorThe single most important thing is this: everyone inthe vehicle, including the driver, should buckle up.See Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone onpage 20. In fact, most serious injuries and fatalitiesto unbelted occupants can be reduced or preventedby the use of safety belts. In a rollover crash,an unbelted person is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seat belt. In addition,avoiding excessive speed, sudden or abrupt turns,and drunken or aggressive driving can help maketrips safer and avoid the possibility of a crash,especially a rollover crash. This section providesmany useful tips to help you drive more safely.

228

Driving EnvironmentYou can also help avoid a rollover or othertype of crash by being prepared for driving ininclement weather, at night, or during other timeswhere visibility or traction may be limited, suchas on curves, slippery roads, or hilly terrain.Unfamiliar surroundings can also have hiddenhazards.

To help you learn more about driving in differentconditions, this section contains informationabout city, freeway, and off-road driving,as well as other hints for driving in variousweather conditions.

Vehicle DesignAccording to the U.S. Department ofTransportation, utility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.Utility vehicles do have higher ground clearanceand a narrower track or shorter wheelbase thanpassenger cars, to make them more capablefor off-road driving. Specific design characteristicslike these give the driver a better view of theroad, but also give utility vehicles a higher centerof gravity than other types of vehicles. This meansthat you should not expect a utility vehicle tohandle the same way a vehicle with a lower centerof gravity, like a car, would in similar situations.

But driver behavior factors are far more oftenthe cause of a utility vehicle rollover than areenvironmental or vehicle factors. Safe driverbehavior and understanding the environmentin which you will be driving can help avoida rollover crash in any type of vehicle, includingutility vehicles.

229

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 20.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

230

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol,with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

231

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of hersame body weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

232

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision.At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of thisdriver having a collision is 12 times greater; ata level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 timesgreater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart. This means that when anyonewho has been drinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person’s chance of being killed orpermanently disabled is higher than if the personhad not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you are with agroup, designate a driver who will notdrink.

233

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 238.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 304.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 170.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

234

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some peopledrive in spurts — heavy acceleration followedby heavy braking — rather than keeping pacewith traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes maynot have time to cool between hard stops.The brakes will wear out much faster if youdo a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace withthe traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while youare driving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harderto push down. If the engine stops, you will stillhave some power brake assist. But you willuse it when you brake. Once the power assistis used up, it may take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 304.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle might have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light on theinstrument panel willcome on brieflywhen you start yourvehicle.

When you start the engine, or when you beginto drive away, ABS will check itself. You might heara momentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you might even notice that thebrake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

235

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, the computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

236

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You might feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS,your first reaction — to hit the brake pedalhard and hold it down — might be the wrongthing to do. Your wheels can stop rolling.

Once they do, the vehicle cannot respond to yoursteering. Momentum will carry it in whateverdirection it was headed when the wheels stoppedrolling. That could be off the road, into the verything you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want tosqueeze the brakes hard without locking thewheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding,ease off the brake pedal. This will help youretain steering control. If you do have ABS, it isdifferent. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)on page 235.

In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

237

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a traction control systemthat limits wheel spin. This is especially usefulin slippery road conditions. The system operatesonly if it senses that one or both of the front wheelsare spinning or beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, the system reduces engine power tolimit wheel spin.

This light will come onwhen your tractioncontrol system islimiting wheel spin.

See Low Traction Light on page 173. You mayfeel or hear the system working, but this is normal.

The traction control system automatically comeson whenever you start your vehicle. To limitwheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions,you should always leave the system on.

But you can turn the traction control system off ifyou ever need to. You should turn the systemoff if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud,ice or snow and rocking the vehicle is required.See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out onpage 277 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 276 for moreinformation.

If your vehicle isequipped with the2.2L L4 engine, thetraction control systemcan be turned off bypressing the tractioncontrol button.

It is located on the instrument panel above theaudio system.

If your vehicle is equipped with the 3.5L V6 engine,the traction control system will be turned off whenthe shift lever is in REVERSE (R) or LOW (L).The traction control system warning light will bedisplayed on the instrument panel. See TractionControl System (TCS) Warning Light on page 172for more information.

238

The traction control system can be activated againby pressing the traction control button for the2.2L L4 engine, or by selecting DRIVE (D)or INTERMEDIATE (I) for the 3.5L V6 engine.

If the system is limiting wheel spin when you pressthe button, the system will not turn off until thereis no longer a current need to limit wheel spin.You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again. If the traction controlwarning light does not come on, you may not havetraction control and your vehicle should beserviced at a retailer.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 304 for more information.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) SystemIf your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), theAWD system operates automatically without anyaction required by the driver. If the front drivewheels begin to slip, the rear wheels willautomatically begin to drive the vehicle asrequired. There may be a slight engagementnoise during hard use but this is normal.

During heavy AWD applications, the enginetorque may be reduced to protect AWD systemcomponents. If the vehicle is exposed to extendedheavy AWD usage, the AWD system will shutitself off to protect the system from overheating.When the system cools down, the AWD systemwill activate itself again automatically; thiscool-down can take up to 20 minutes dependingon outside temperature and vehicle use.

239

Steering

Electric Power SteeringIf the engine stalls while you are driving, thepower steering assist system will continueto operate until you are able to stop your vehicle.If you lose power steering assist because theelectric power steering system is not functioning,you can steer, but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel in either directionseveral times until it stops, or hold the steeringwheel in the stopped position for an extendedamount of time, you may notice a reduced amountof power steering assist. The normal amount ofpower steering assist should return shortly after afew normal steering movements.

The electric power steering system does notrequire regular maintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems and/or the ServiceVehicle Soon light comes on, contact yourdealer/retailer for service repairs.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The traction of the tires against theroad surface makes it possible for the vehicle tochange its path when you turn the front wheels.If there is no traction, inertia will keep the vehiclegoing in the same direction. If you have evertried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you willunderstand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

240

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too muchof those places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm those placeswhere the tires meet the road and make you losecontrol. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 238.

What should you do if this ever happens?Ease up on the brake or accelerator pedal,steer the vehicle the way you want it to go,and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions youwill want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories canaffect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 304.

241

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time.But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply the brakes — but, unlessyou have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock thewheels. See Braking on page 234. It is betterto remove as much speed as you can froma possible collision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or right depending on thespace available.

An emergency like this requires close attention anda quick decision. If you are holding the steeringwheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoided theobject.

The fact that such emergency situations arealways possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

242

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your vehicle’s right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile you are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn thesteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

243

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the rightlane and do not get too close. Time your moveso you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, you will have a runningstart that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancelyour pass, you need only slow down and dropback again and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

244

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatan outside convex mirror makes the vehicleyou just passed seem farther away from youthan it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it might be slowing down or starting toturn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy forthe following driver to get ahead of you.Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,the wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

245

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If you have the Traction Control System (TCS),remember: It helps avoid only the accelerationskid. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 238. If you do not have this system, or ifthe system is off, then an acceleration skid isalso best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehiclecontrol more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction,try your best to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear.Any sudden changes could cause the tires toslide. You may not realize the surface is slipperyuntil your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognizewarning clues — such as enough water, ice,or packed snow on the road to make a mirroredsurface — and slow down when you have anydoubt.

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid.If you do not have ABS, then in a brakingskid, where the wheels are no longer rolling,release enough pressure on the brakes to getthe wheels rolling again. This restores steeringcontrol. Push the brake pedal down steadilywhen you have to stop suddenly. As long as thewheels are rolling, you will have steering control.

246

Off-Road DrivingThis off-road guide is for vehicles that haveall-wheel drive. If your vehicle does not haveall-wheel drive, you should not drive off-roadunless you are on a level, solid surface.

Many of the same design features that help makeyour vehicle responsive on paved roads duringpoor weather conditions — features like all-wheeldrive — help make it much better suited for off-roaduse. Its higher ground clearance also helps yourvehicle step over some off-road obstacles. Butyour vehicle does not have features like specialunderbody shielding and a transfer case low gearrange, things that are usually thought necessary forextended or severe off-road service.

Also, see Braking on page 234.

The airbag system is designed to work properlyunder a wide range of conditions, including off-roadusage. Observe safe driving speeds, especiallyon rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it doeshave some definite hazards. The greatest of theseis the terrain itself.

“Off-roading” means you have left the NorthAmerican road system behind. Traffic lanes arenot marked. Curves are not banked. There areno road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough,uphill, or downhill. In short, you have goneright back to nature.

Off-road driving involves some new skills. Andthat is why it is very important that you readthis guide. You will find many driving tips andsuggestions. These will help make your off-roaddriving safer and more enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-RoadingThere are some things to do before you go out.For example, be sure to have all necessarymaintenance and service work done. Is thereenough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are thefluid levels up where they should be? What arethe local laws that apply to off-roading where youwill be driving? If you do not know, you shouldcheck with law enforcement people in the area.Will you be on someone’s private land? If so,be sure to get the necessary permission.

247

Loading Your Vehicle for Off-RoadDriving

{CAUTION:

• Cargo on the load floor piled higherthan the seatbacks can be thrownforward during a sudden stop. You oryour passengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top of theseatbacks.

• Unsecured cargo on the load floor canbe tossed about when driving overrough terrain. You or your passengerscan be struck by flying objects.Secure the cargo properly.

• Heavy loads on the roof raise thevehicle’s center of gravity, making itmore likely to roll over. You can beseriously or fatally injured if thevehicle rolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not on the roof.Keep cargo in the cargo area as farforward and low as possible.

There are some important things to rememberabout how to load your vehicle.

• The heaviest things should be on theload floor and forward of the rear axle.Put heavier items as far forward as you can.

• Be sure the load is secured properly, sodriving on the off-road terrain does nottoss things around.

You will find other important information in thismanual. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279,Roof Rack System on page 134, and Tires onpage 366.

248

Environmental ConcernsOff-road driving can provide wholesome andsatisfying recreation. However, it also raisesenvironmental concerns. We recognize theseconcerns and urge every off-roader to follow thesebasic rules for protecting the environment:

• Always use established trails, roads, and areasthat have been specially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving; obey all postedregulations.

• Avoid any driving practice that could damagethe environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking down trees, orunnecessary driving through streams orover soft ground.

• Always carry a litter bag — make sure allrefuse is removed from any campsitebefore leaving.

• Take extreme care with open fires wherepermitted, camp stoves, and lanterns.

• Never park your vehicle over dry grass orother combustible materials that couldcatch fire from the heat of the vehicle’sexhaust system.

Traveling to Remote AreasIt makes sense to plan your trip, especially whengoing to a remote area. Know the terrain andplan your route. You are much less likely to getbad surprises. Get accurate maps of trailsand terrain. Try to learn of any blocked orclosed roads.

It is also a good idea to travel with at least oneother vehicle. If something happens to oneof them, the other can help quickly.

249

Getting Familiar with Off-Road DrivingIt is a good idea to practice in an area that issafe and close to home before you go into thewilderness. Off-road driving does require some newand different driving skills. Here is what we mean.

Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweepthe terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds.With your arms, hands, feet, and body, youwill need to respond to vibrations and vehiclebounce.

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successfuloff-road driving. One of the best ways tocontrol your vehicle is to control your speed.

Here are some things to keep in mind. At higherspeeds:

• You approach things faster and you have lesstime to scan the terrain for obstacles.

• You have less time to react.

• You have more vehicle bounce when youdrive over obstacles.

• You will need more distance for braking,especially since you are on an unpavedsurface.

{CAUTION:

When you are driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in direction can easilythrow you out of position. This couldcause you to lose control and crash. So,whether you are driving on or off the road,you and your passengers should wearsafety belts.

250

Scanning the TerrainOff-road driving can take you over many differentkinds of terrain. You need to be familiar withthe terrain and its many different features.Here are some things to consider.

Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take youover hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces affectsthe steering, acceleration, and braking of yourvehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kindof surface you are on, you may experience slipping,sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poortraction, and longer braking distances.

Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstaclescan be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, orbump can startle you if you are not preparedfor them. Often these obstacles are hidden bygrass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and fall ofthe terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:

• Is the path ahead clear?

• Will the surface texture change abruptlyup ahead?

• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?There is more discussion of these subjectslater.

• Will you have to stop suddenly or changedirection quickly?

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain,keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts,troughs, or other surface features can jerkthe wheel out of your hands if you are notprepared.

251

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or otherobstacles, the wheels can leave the ground.If this happens, even with one or two wheels,you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all.

Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it isespecially important to avoid sudden acceleration,sudden turns, or sudden braking.

In a way, off-road driving requires a different kindof alertness from driving on paved roads andhighways. There are no road signs, posted speedlimits, or signal lights. You have to use yourown good judgment about what is safe andwhat is not.

Drinking and driving can be very dangerous onany road. And this is certainly true for off-roaddriving. At the very time you need special alertnessand driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions,and judgment can be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have a serious — oreven fatal — accident if you drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking.See Drunken Driving on page 231.

Driving on Off-Road HillsOff-road driving often takes you up, down, oracross a hill. Driving safely on hills requiresgood judgment and understanding of what yourvehicle can and cannot do. There are somehills that simply cannot be driven, no matterhow well built the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Many hills are simply too steep for anyvehicle. If you drive up them, you willstall. If you drive down them, you cannotcontrol your speed. If you drive acrossthem, you will roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness, do not drivethe hill.

252

Approaching a HillWhen you approach a hill, you need to decide if itis one of those hills that is just too steep to climb,descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.On a very small hill, for example, there may be asmooth, constant incline with only a small change inelevation where you can easily see all the way tothe top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeperas you near the top, but you may not see thisbecause the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes,grass, or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consider as youapproach a hill.

• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill getsharply steeper in places?

• Is there good traction on the hillside, or willthe surface cause tire slipping?

• Is there a straight path up or down the hill soyou will not have to make turning maneuvers?

• Are there obstructions on the hill that canblock your path, such as boulders, trees, logs,or ruts?

• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, anembankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get outand walk the hill if you do not know. It is thesmart way to find out.

• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills oftenhave ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposedrocks because they are more susceptibleto the effects of erosion.

253

Driving UphillOnce you decide you can safely drive up the hill,you need to take some special steps.

• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on thesteering wheel.

• Get a smooth start up the hill and try tomaintain speed. Do not use more powerthan you need, because you do not wantthe wheels to start spinning or sliding.

{CAUTION:

Turning or driving across steep hills canbe dangerous. You could lose traction,slide sideways, and possibly roll over.You could be seriously injured or killed.When driving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.If the path twists and turns, you might want tofind another route.

• Ease up on the speed as you approach thetop of the hill.

• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make it morevisible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

• Sound the horn as you approach the top of thehill to let opposing traffic know you are there.

• Use your headlamps even during the day.They make your vehicle more visible tooncoming traffic.

{CAUTION:

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at fullspeed can cause an accident. There couldbe a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

254

Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or isabout to stall, and I cannot make it upthe hill?

A: If this happens, there are some things youshould do, and there are some things you mustnot do. First, here is what you should do:

• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle andkeep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply theparking brake.

• If the engine is still running, shift the transaxleto REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).

• If the engine has stopped running, you willneed to restart it. With the brake pedal pressedand the parking brake still applied, shift thetransaxle to PARK (P), or shift to NEUTRAL ifyou have a manual transaxle, and restart theengine. Then shift to REVERSE (R), releasethe parking brake, and slowly back down thehill as straight as possible in REVERSE (R).

• As you are backing down the hill, put your lefthand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clockposition. This way you will be able to tell if thewheels are straight and maneuver as you backdown. It is best that you back down the hill withthe wheels straight rather than in the left or rightdirection. Turning the wheel too far to the left orright will increase the possibility of a rollover.

Here are some things you must not do if you stall,or are about to stall, when going up a hill.

• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting intoNEUTRAL (N), or pressing the clutch if youhave a manual transaxle, to rev-up the engineand regain forward momentum. This will notwork. Your vehicle will roll backwards veryquickly and you could go out of control.Instead, apply the regular brake to stop thevehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift toREVERSE (R), release the parking brake, andslowly back straight down.

• Never attempt to turn around if you are about tostall when going up a hill. If the hill is steepenough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enoughto cause it to roll over if you turn around. If youcannot make it up the hill you must backstraight down the hill.

255

Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back downthe hill and decide I just cannot do it.What should I do?

A: Set the parking brake, put your transaxle inPARK (P), or FIRST (1) if your vehicle has amanual transaxle, and turn off the engine.Leave the vehicle and go get some help.Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of thepath the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill.

Driving DownhillWhen off-roading takes you downhill, you will wantto consider a number of things:

• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able tomaintain vehicle control?

• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?Logs? Boulders?

• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there ahidden creek bank or even a river bottomwith large rocks?

If you decide you can go down a hill safely, thentry to keep your vehicle headed straight down, anduse a low gear. This way, engine drag can helpthe brakes and they will not have to do allthe work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicleunder control at all times.

{CAUTION:

Heavy braking when going down a hill cancause your brakes to overheat and fade.This could cause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply the brakes lightlywhen descending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed under control.

256

Q: Are there some things I should not dowhen driving down a hill?

A: Yes! These are important because if youignore them you could lose control andhave a serious accident.

• When driving downhill, avoid turns that takeyou across the incline of the hill. A hill thatis not too steep to drive down may betoo steep to drive across. Your vehicle couldroll over if you do not drive straight down.

• Never go downhill with the transaxle inNEUTRAL (N). This is called “free wheeling.”The brakes will have to do all the workand could overheat and fade.

• Unless your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, avoidbraking so hard that you lock the wheels whengoing downhill. If the wheels are locked, youcannot steer your vehicle. If the wheels lock upduring downhill braking, you may feel thevehicle starting to slide sideways. To regainyour direction, just ease off the brakes andsteer to keep the front of the vehicle pointingstraight downhill.

Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?

A: It is much more likely to happen goinguphill. But if it happens going downhill,here is what to do.

1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regularbrakes. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift to PARK (P), or NEUTRAL if you havea manual transaxle, and, while still braking,restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parkingbrake, and drive straight down.

4. If the engine will not start, get out andget help.

257

Driving Across an InclineSooner or later, an off-road trail will probablygo across the incline of a hill. If this happens, youhave to decide whether to try to drive acrossthe incline. Here are some things to consider:

{CAUTION:

Driving across an incline that is too steepwill make your vehicle roll over. You couldbe seriously injured or killed. If you haveany doubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it. Find anotherroute instead.

• A hill that can be driven straight up or downmay be too steep to drive across. When yougo straight up or down a hill, the length of thewheel base — the distance from the frontwheels to the rear wheels — reduces thelikelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end.

But when you drive across an incline, themuch more narrow track width — the distancebetween the left and right wheels — may notprevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.Also, driving across an incline puts more weighton the downhill wheels. This could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

• Surface conditions can be a problem whenyou drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass can cause yourtires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicleslips sideways, it can hit something that willtrip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.

• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness ofthe incline even worse. If you drive across arock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhillwheels drop into a rut or depression, yourvehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decidecarefully whether to try to drive across an incline.Just because the trail goes across the inclinedoes not mean you have to drive it. The lastvehicle to try it might have rolled over.

258

Q: What if I am driving across an incline thatis not too steep, but I hit some loosegravel and start to slide downhill.What should I do?

A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slidesideways, turn downhill. This should helpstraighten out the vehicle and prevent theside slipping. However, a much better wayto prevent this is to get out and “walkthe course” so you know what the surface islike before you drive it.

Stalling on an Incline

{CAUTION:

Getting out on the downhill (low) side ofa vehicle stopped across an incline isdangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, youcould be crushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of the vehicle andstay well clear of the rollover path.

If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing anincline, be sure you, and any passengers, getout on the uphill side, even if the door thereis harder to open. If you get out on the downhillside and the vehicle starts to roll over, you will beright in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of thepath the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

259

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or IceWhen you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheelswill not get good traction. You cannot accelerateas quickly, turning is more difficult, and youwill need longer braking distances.

It is best to use a low gear when you are inmud —the deeper the mud, the lower the gear.In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehiclemoving so you do not get stuck.

When you drive on sand, you will sense a changein wheel traction. But it will depend upon howloosely packed the sand is. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sand dunes,your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This hasan effect on steering, accelerating, and braking.Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns orabrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tiretraction. On these surfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, the traction isso poor that you will have difficulty accelerating.And, if you do get moving, poor steering anddifficult braking can cause you to slide outof control.

{CAUTION:

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or riverscan be dangerous. Underwater springs,currents under the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehicle couldfall through the ice and you and yourpassengers could drown. Drive yourvehicle on safe surfaces only.

260

Driving in Water

{CAUTION:

Driving through rushing water can bedangerous. Deep water can sweep yourvehicle downstream and you and yourpassengers could drown. If it is onlyshallow water, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, and youcould lose traction and roll the vehicleover. Do not drive through rushing water.

Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and floodwaters demand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before you drivethrough it. If it is deep enough to cover thewheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do nottry it — you probably will not get through.Also, water that deep can damage the axleand other vehicle parts.

If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignitionsystem and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can alsooccur if you get the tailpipe under water. And,as long as the tailpipe is under water, you willnever be able to start the engine. When you gothrough water, remember that when the brakes getwet, it may take you longer to stop.

See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads onpage 264 for more information on drivingthrough water.

261

After Off-Road DrivingRemove any brush or debris that has collectedon the underbody, chassis, or under the hood.These accumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, have the brakelinings cleaned and checked. These substancescan cause glazing and uneven braking. Check thebody structure, steering, suspension, wheels,tires, and exhaust system for damage. Also, checkthe fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.

Your vehicle will require more frequent servicedue to off-road use. Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule for additional information.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, slow down andkeep more space between you and othervehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

262

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They might cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make a lotof things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Even theinside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flashmore than clean glass would, making the pupilsof your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see indim light — and are not even aware of it.

263

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate,or turn as well because your tire-to-roadtraction is not as good as on dry roads.

And, if your tires do not have much tread left, youwill get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fallwhile you are driving. The surface may get wetsuddenly when your reflexes are tuned for drivingon dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer fluidreservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signs ofstreaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate fromthe inserts.

264

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot,try to slow down before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen ifa lot of water is standing on the road. If youcan see reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

265

Driving Through Deep Standing WaterNotice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through the engine’s air intakeand badly damage the engine. Never drivethrough water that is slightly lower than theunderbody of your vehicle. If you cannotavoid deep puddles or standing water,drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle.



If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especiallycareful when you pass another vehicle.Allow yourself more clear room ahead, andbe prepared to have your view restrictedby road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 366.

266

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 268.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

267

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Driveat the same speed most of the other drivers aredriving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks asmooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freewayas a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp,you should begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

268

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to your speedometer,not to your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make too manymiles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortableclothing and shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.

Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts at dealers/retailers all across theUnited States and Canada. They are readyand willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

269

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch ofroad with the same scenery, along with thehum of the tires on the road, the drone of theengine, and the rush of the wind against thevehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let ithappen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leavethe road in less than a second, and you couldcrash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,with a comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the roadahead and to the sides. Check your rearviewmirrors and your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road intoa rest, service, or parking area and take anap, get some exercise, or both. For safety,treat drowsiness on the highway as anemergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

270

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes couldget so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have theengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you canclimb the hill better.

271

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 366.

272

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,a red cloth, and reflective warning triangles.And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,include a small bag of sand, a piece of oldcarpet, or a couple of burlap bags to help providetraction. Be sure you properly secure theseitems in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between thetires and the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, orgrip, and will need to be very careful. What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold

snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

273

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more.

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 235.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.On an otherwise clear road, ice patches mayappear in shaded areas where the sun cannotreach, such as around clumps of trees, behindbuildings, or under bridges. Sometimes thesurface of a curve or an overpass may remainicy when the surrounding roads are clear. If yousee a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could bein a serious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you arenear help and you can hike through the snow. Hereare some things to do to summon help and keepyourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanketaround you. If you do not have blanketsor extra clothing, make body insulatorsfrom newspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor mats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

274

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so you mightnot know it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blocking theexhaust pipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make itgo a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.

275

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do itas little as possible. Preserve the fuel as longas you can. To help keep warm, you can get outof the vehicle and do some fairly vigorousexercises every half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transaxle orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transaxle back and forth, you can destroythe transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 277.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 384.

276

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.If your vehicle has traction control, you should turnthe system off. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 238. Then shift back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward gear, or with amanual transaxle, between FIRST (1) orSECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinningthe wheels as little as possible. Release theaccelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightlyon the accelerator pedal when the transaxle isin gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directions, you will causea rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If thatdoes not get your vehicle out after a few tries,it may need to be towed out. Or, you canuse the recovery hook if your vehicle has one.If your vehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing Your Vehicle on page 284.

Recovery Hook

{CAUTION:

The recovery hook, when used, is undera lot of force. Always pull the vehiclestraight out. Never pull on the hook at asideways angle. The hook could break offand you or others could be injured fromthe chain or cable snapping back.

Notice: Never use the recovery hook to towthe vehicle. Your vehicle could be damagedand it would not be covered by warranty.

Contact your dealer/retailer if you would like tohave a recovery hook installed on your vehicle.

277

The recovery hook is located at the rear of yourvehicle. It can only be used for pulling the vehicleout if it is stuck, not for towing the vehicle.

278

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and the Certification/Tire label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).With the driver’s door open, you will find thelabel attached below the door lock post (striker).The tire and loading information label showsthe number of occupant seating positions (A),and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

Example Label

279

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 366 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 374.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) andthe Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.

See Towing a Trailer on page 290 for importantinformation on towing a trailer, towing safety rulesand trailering tips.

280

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

B Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)



B Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs (340 kg)


Example 1 Example 2

281



B Subtract Occupant Weight200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)


Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions.The combined weight of the driver, passengersand cargo should never exceed your vehicle’smaximum vehicle capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label isattached to the rear edge of the driver’s door.The label shows the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailertongue weight, if your vehicle is pulling a trailer.

Example 3

282

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).To find out the actual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Your retailer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your load equally onboth sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

Similar looking vehicles may have differentGVWRs and payloads. Please consult yourvehicle’s Certification/Tire label or your retailerfor additional details.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Using heavier suspension components to getadded durability might not change your vehicle’sweight ratings. Ask your retailer to help youload your vehicle correctly if you are using thesecomponents.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

283

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your retailer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 445.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such asbehind a motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

284

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behinda motorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground) and “dolly towing” (towing your vehiclewith two wheels on the ground and two wheels upon a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment,many vehicles can be towed in these ways.See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing” followingin this section.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additional advice andequipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 269.

285

Dinghy TowingFront-wheel-drive vehicles equipped with a manualtransmission, four-speed automatic transmissionor five-speed automatic transmission may bedinghy towed from the front. These vehicles mayalso be towed by putting the front wheels on adolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this section.

All-wheel-drive vehicles with the five-speedautomatic transmission can be dinghy towed fromthe front. You can also tow these vehicles byplacing them on a platform trailer with allfour wheels off of the ground. These vehiclescannot be towed using a dolly.

To tow your vehicle from the front with allfour wheels on the ground, do the following:

1. Position and attach the vehicle to tow it behindthe recreational vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition key to ACC.

3. Turn fog lamps and all accessories off.

4. If your vehicle has the manual transmission,shift your transmission to NEUTRAL andlet the engine run for three minutes, thenturn it off.If your vehicle has the five-speed automatictransmission, shift your transmission fromDRIVE (D) to NEUTRAL (N) and let the enginerun for three minutes. Then turn it off.Due to transmission fluid drain back, thetransmission lubrication procedure in Step 4 isrequired every seven hours after the initialprocedure has been completed, regardless ofthe vehicle being towed or parked. Once theprocedure is performed, the transmissionis adequately lubricated and can berecreational vehicle towed for seven hoursprior to repeating the lubrication procedure.

286

As an example, if you initially perform thelubrication procedure and tow your vehicle forthree hours, then park for four hours, thelubrication procedure will need to be performedagain, prior to dinghy towing the vehicle.

Notice: Towing your vehicle after shifting theautomatic transaxle (four-speed or five-speed)from anything other than DRIVE (D) toNEUTRAL (N) can cause internal damage tothe automatic transaxle. Always shift theautomatic transaxle (four-speed or five-speed)from DRIVE (D) to NEUTRAL (N) as the lastshift before towing.

5. Locate and remove the large IGN fuse fromthe underhood fuse block. See UnderhoodFuse Block on page 411.

Notice: If you tow your vehicle withoutperforming each of the steps listed under“Dinghy Towing,” you could damage theautomatic transmission. Be sure to follow allsteps of the dinghy towing procedure priorto and after towing your vehicle.

Notice: If your vehicle has a four-speedautomatic transmission, it can be dinghy towedfrom the front for unlimited miles at 65 mph(105 km/h). If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)while towing your vehicle, it could be damaged.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)while towing your vehicle.

Notice: If your vehicle has a five-speedautomatic transmission and it is towed formore than seven hours without performinglubrication process or at speeds greater than65 mph (105 km/h), you could damage theautomatic transmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Do not towyour vehicle for extended periods of time or atspeeds greater than 65 mph (105 km/h).

After seven hours, repeat Step 4 above for thefive-speed automatic transmission.

287

Once you have reached your destination, do thefollowing:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for amanual transmission. Shift the transmission toPARK (P) for an automatic transmission.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK and remove thekey from the ignition.

4. Reinstall the large IGN fuse.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage the transmission. Be sure that thetransaxle fluid is at the proper level beforetowing with all four wheels on the ground.

Notice: Don’t tow a vehicle with the front drivewheels on the ground if one of the front tiresis a compact spare tire. Towing with twodifferent tire sizes on the front of the vehiclecan cause severe damage to the transmission.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)All-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed withtwo wheels on the ground. To properly towthese vehicles, they should be placed on aplatform trailer with all four wheels off of theground or dinghy towed from the front.

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

288

To tow your front-wheel-drive vehicle from the frontwith two wheels on the ground, do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.2. If you have a five-speed automatic

transmission or four-speed automatictransmission, move the shift lever toPARK (P). If you have a manual transmission,move the shift lever to SECOND (2).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designed fortowing.

5. Release the parking brake.

Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear

Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairs would notbe covered by the warranty. Never have yourvehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow your vehicle from the rear.

289

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer/retailer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costly repairsnot covered by your warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in this part and seeyour dealer/retailer for important informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped withthe proper trailer towing equipment. To identifythe trailering capacity of your vehicle, you shouldread the information in “Weight of the Trailer”that appears later in this section. Traileringis different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in handling,acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tiresare forced to work harder against the drag ofthe added weight. The engine is requiredto operate at relatively higher speeds and undergreater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

290

If You Do Decide to Pull a TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving.A good source for this information can bestate or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”later in this section.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (805 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• If you have an automatic transmission, you canuse INTERMEDIATE (I) or as you need to, alower gear which will minimize heat buildup andextend the life of your transmission.

• If you have a manual transmission, you shouldnot use FIFTH (5) gear. Drive in FOURTH (4)gear or as you need to a lower gear.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

• Don’t tow a trailer when the outsidetemperature is above 100°F (38°C).

Three important considerations have to dowith weight:

• the weight of the trailer

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires

291

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,500 lbs(680 kg). But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have on yourvehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo must be subtracted from the maximumtrailer weight.

You can ask your retailer for trailering informationor advice.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengersor cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongueload to the GVW because your vehicle will becarrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 279 for more information aboutyour vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

292

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailertongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of thetotal loaded trailer weight (B). If you’re using aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailerweight (B).

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s abilityto carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannotcause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR(Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effectof additional weight may reduce your traileringcapacity more than the total of the additionalweight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the frontaxle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle.It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg),a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and aGCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)of 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).

293

The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind therear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greaterthan just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 timesas much. The weight at the rear axle couldbe 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings thetotal to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to,but within the limit for RGAWR as well. Thevehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped withsome of the latest options and you have a front seatpassenger and two rear seat passengers withsome luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.

You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axleweight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle weight.Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacityto stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailerwould only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You maygo further and think you must limit tongue weightto less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceedingGVWR. But, you must still consider the effecton the rear axle. Because your rear axle nowweighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can onlyput 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle withoutexceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight isabout 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being ableto handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.

294

Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percentof total loaded trailer weight, you can expectthat the largest trailer your vehicle can properlyhandle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Ratingor Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure youare not exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You will find thesenumbers on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit foryour vehicle or the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR), including the weight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you will need theright hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is notintended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does notattach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the bodyof your vehicle when you install a trailerhitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holeslater when you remove the hitch. If you don’tseal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.See Engine Exhaust on page 123. Dirt andwater can, too.

295

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains betweenyour vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesIf your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, don’t try totap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system.If you do, both brake systems won’t work well,or at all.

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for thetrailer brakes, so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start your vehicle andtrailer moving and then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your electricalconnection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

296

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer when towing a trailer, you’ll needto go much farther beyond the passed vehiclebefore you can return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, justmove that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making TurnsNotice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.See your retailer if you need information.The arrows on your instrument panel will flashwhenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you’re about toturn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even ifthe bulbs on the trailer are burned out.

297

Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeingyour signal when they are not. It’s important tocheck occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs arestill working.

Driving on GradesNotice: Do not tow on steep continuousgrades exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended,higher than normal engine and transmissiontemperatures may result and damage yourvehicle. Frequent stops are very important toallow the engine and transmission to cool.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before youstart down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduceyour speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reducethe possibility of the engine and the transmissionoverheating. If your engine does overheat,see Engine Overheating on page 334.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) for an automatic transmission, orinto gear for a manual transmission.When parking uphill, turn your wheels awayfrom the curb. When parking downhill,turn your wheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks behind thetrailer wheels.

298

3. When the chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P) for anautomatic transmission or REVERSE (R) fora manual transmission.

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 420 for more information. Things thatare especially important in trailer operation areautomatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engineoil, axle lubricant, drive belt, cooling system andbrake system. Each of these is covered in thismanual, and the Index will help you find themquickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea toreview this information before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 334.

Changing a Tire When Trailer TowingIf you get a flat tire while towing a trailer, besure to secure the trailer and disconnect it fromthe vehicle before changing the tire.

299

Trailer WiringAdditional wire length has been provided forconnecting trailer wiring to your vehicle. A loop offive wires is stored below the jack, which is locatedon the driver’s side of the cargo area. The wires arefused in both the underhood and instrument fuseblock. See Instrument Panel Fuse Block onpage 410 and Underhood Fuse Block on page 411.

The wires do not have a connector and should bewired to the trailer by a qualified electricaltechnician. The technician can use the followinginformation when connecting a trailer wiringharness to your vehicle.

• Yellow: Left Turn Signal

• Brown: Parking Lamps

• Light Blue: Stop Lamps

• Black: Ground Wire

• Dark Green: Right Turn Signal

When connecting a trailer harness, be sure youleave it loose enough so the wiring does not bendor break, but not so loose that it drags on theground. Store harness below jack in the cargo areawhen it is not in use. Wrap the harness togetherand tie it neatly so it will not be damaged.

300

Service ........................................................ 304Accessories and Modifications ................... 304California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 305Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 305Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 306Fuel ............................................................. 306

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 306Gasoline Specifications .............................. 306California Fuel ........................................... 307Additives ................................................... 307Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 308Filling the Tank ......................................... 309Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 311

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 312Hood Release ........................................... 313Engine Compartment Overview .................. 314Engine Oil ................................................. 318Engine Oil Life System .............................. 323Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 324Automatic Transaxle Fluid

(2.2L L4 Engine) .................................... 327

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(3.5L V6 Engine) .................................... 328

Manual Transaxle Fluid ............................. 330Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 331Engine Coolant .......................................... 331Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 334Engine Overheating ................................... 334Cooling System ......................................... 336Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 341Brakes ...................................................... 343Battery ...................................................... 347Jump Starting ............................................ 348

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 353Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 355Bulb Replacement ....................................... 358

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 358Headlamps ................................................ 358Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ....... 361Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ... 362Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ...................................... 363License Plate Lamp ................................... 364Replacement Bulbs ................................... 364

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

301

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 364Tires ............................................................ 366

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 367Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 371Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 374Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 375When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 377Buying New Tires ...................................... 377Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 379Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 380Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 382Wheel Replacement .................................. 382Tire Chains ............................................... 384If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 385Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 386Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 387Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire ......................... 391Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 397Compact Spare Tire .................................. 398

Appearance Care ........................................ 399Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 399Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 400Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces ........................... 401Care of Safety Belts .................................. 402Weatherstrips ............................................ 402Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 402Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 403Finish Care ............................................... 403Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 404Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 404Tires ......................................................... 405Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 405Finish Damage .......................................... 405Underbody Maintenance ............................ 406Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 406Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 407

Vehicle Identification .................................. 408Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 408Service Parts Identification Label ............... 408


302

Electrical System ........................................ 409Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 409Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 409Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 409

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 409Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 410Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 411

Capacities and Specifications .................... 414


303

ServiceYour Saturn retailer knows your vehicle best andwants you to be happy with it. We hope youwill go to your retailer for all your service needs.You will get genuine Saturn parts andSaturn-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicleall Saturn.

Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-Saturn accessories to yourvehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performanceand safety, including such things as, airbags,braking, stability, ride and handling, emissionssystems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronicsystems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of these accessoriesmay even cause malfunction or damage notcovered by warranty.

Saturn accessories are designed to complementand function with other systems on your vehicle.Your Saturn retailer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine Saturn accessories. When you go toyour Saturn retailer and ask for Saturn accessories,you will know that Saturn-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine Saturn accessories.

304

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one,contain and/or emit chemicals known tothe State of California to cause cancerand birth defects or other reproductive harm.Engine exhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids,and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you should use the proper service manual. Ittells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order the properservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 453.

305

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 88.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 436.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your retailer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, Saturn recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you might notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). Saturn recommends against the useof gasolines containing MMT. See Additives onpage 307 for additional information.

306

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. See theunderhood emission control label. If this fuel is notavailable in states adopting California emissionsstandards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily onfuels meeting federal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on and yourvehicle may fail a smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 175. If this occurs, return toyour authorized Saturn retailer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be covered by yourwarranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in theUnited States are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your retailer has additives that will help correctand prevent most deposit-related problems.

307

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. We recommend thatyou use these gasolines if they comply withthe specifications described earlier. However,E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing morethan 10% ethanol must not be used in vehiclesthat were not designed for those fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated forlow emissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.

We recommend against the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life ofspark plugs and the performance of the emissioncontrol system may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return toyour retailer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel mightbe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

308

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against thelaw in some places. Do not re-enter thevehicle while pumping fuel. Keep childrenaway from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

309

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; ifthe cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open thefuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel andthen something ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 402.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwiseuntil it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 175.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flowof fuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer/ retailer canget one for you. If you get the wrong type,it may not fit properly. This may causeyour malfunction indicator lamp to light andmay damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 175.

310

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignitethe gasoline vapor. You can be badlyburned and your vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to you andothers:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is insidea vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.



• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumpinggasoline.

• Do not use a cellular phone whilepumping gasoline.

311

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

312

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handle withthis symbol on it.It is locatedunder the instrumentpanel on thedriver’s side ofthe vehicle.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift upon the secondary hood release lever.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then pull the hood down andclose it firmly.

313

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 engine, you will see the following:

314

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 324.

B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 318.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 318.

D. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 348.

E. Brake/Clutch Cylinder Fluid. See Brakes onpage 343 and Hydraulic Clutch on page 331.

F. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 411.

G. Battery. See Battery on page 347.H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 348.I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See “Checking

Coolant” under Engine Coolant on page 331.J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 341.

315

When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine, you will see the following:

316

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 324.

B. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 318.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of View). See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 318.

D. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 348.

E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes onpage 343.

F. Battery. See Battery on page 347.G. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse

Block on page 411.H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal (Out of View).

See Jump Starting on page 348.I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See “Checking

Coolant” under Engine Coolant on page 331.J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 341.

317

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop forthe 2.2L L4 engine and an orange loop for the3.5L V6 engine. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 314 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

2.2L L4 Engine

3.5L V6 Engine

318

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark for the2.2L L4 engine or below the lower mark (B) forthe 3.5L V6 engine, you need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use the rightkind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 414.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe upper mark that shows the properoperating range, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 314for the location of the engine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range.Push the dipstick all the way back in when youare through.

2.2L L4 Engine 3.5L V6 Engine

319

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseFor Vehicles with the 2.2L L4 Engine Only

Look for three things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. Look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

320

• Oils meeting theserequirements shouldhave the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. Thissymbol indicates thatthe oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provideeasier cold starting and better protection forthe engine at extremely low temperatures.

321

For Vehicles with the 3.5L V6 Engine Only

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-20 isbest for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container,and use only those oils that have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil with the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For GasolineEngines starburst symbol. Failure to use therecommended oil can result in engine damagenot covered by your warranty.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoil with the starburst symbol are all you needfor good performance and engine protection.

322

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A change engine oil light will come on.See Change Engine Oil Light on page 179. Changethe oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are drivingunder the best conditions, the oil life system mightnot indicate that an oil change is necessary for overa year. However, the engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your dealer/retailer hastrained service people who will perform this workusing genuine parts and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularly and keep it atthe proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Whenever the oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange the oil prior to a change engine oil lightbeing turned on, reset the system.

After changing the engine oil, reset the system:

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with theengine off.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedalthree times within five seconds.If the change engine oil light is flashing, thesystem is reset. The light will flash for upto 30 seconds or until the ignition is turned off.

If the light comes on again and stays on for30 seconds at the next ignition cycle, it did notreset. You will need to reset the system again.

323

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that canbe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for verylong. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of used oil, ask yourdealer/retailer, a service station, or a localrecycling center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview on page 314for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 420 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

324

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:

1. Unscrew the clamp on the air duct hose.

2. Disconnect the hose.

325

3. Release the clamps on the side of the aircleaner assembly.

4. Turn the cover upward to disengage thecover hinges.

5. Remove the air cleaner cover assembly andair filter element.

6. Inspect or replace the air filter element.If the air filter element is dirty, you shouldreplace it. If it is only dusty, it may be cleanedby blowing compressed air through it fromthe clean side.Make sure you are away from the enginecompartment when cleaning the air filter withcompressed air.

326

Wipe all dust from inside of the housing andinspect the air cleaner and air outlet ductfor cracks, cuts and deterioration. Theair outlet duct must be replaced if damaged.

7. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstallthe engine air cleaner/filter cover and airduct hose.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to beburned. The air cleaner not only cleans theair; it helps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and the enginebackfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working onthe engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(2.2L L4 Engine)

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check your automatic transaxlefluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid at the intervals listed in AdditionalRequired Services on page 423, and be sure touse the transaxle fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 432.

How to Check AutomaticTransaxle FluidIf your vehicle is equipped with the 2.2L L4engine, you will have to have this procedure doneat your retailer’s service department.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 432.

327

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(3.5L V6 Engine)

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check your automatic transaxlefluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid at the intervals listed in AdditionalRequired Services on page 423, and be sure touse the transaxle fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 432.

How to Check AutomaticTransaxle FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at your retailer’sservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damagethe transaxle. Too much can mean that some ofthe fluid could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if you checkthe transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures areabove 90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is 180°F to200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

328

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a level place.

2. Warm the engine to normal operatingtemperature until the electric radiator fan turnson at least once.

3. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

4. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

Then, turn off the engine and follow these steps:

The transaxle fluid dipstick handle is the black loopnear the rear of the engine compartment, towardthe center.

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three secondsand then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be betweenthe upper mark and the lower mark.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way.

329

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 432.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough ofthe proper fluid to bring the level into thecross-hatched area on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 432.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way.

Manual Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluidloss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to yourretailer’s service department and have it repairedas soon as possible. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 432 for the proper fluidto use.

Notice: Use of manual transaxle fluid otherthan that listed in the Maintenance Schedulemay damage your vehicle, and the damagesmay not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse the correct manual transaxle fluid inyour vehicle. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 432 for the correct manualtransaxle fluid.

330

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. The hydraulic clutch system doesnot have its own reservoir. The system receivesfluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir. It isfilled with DOT-3 brake fluid. See Brakes onpage 343 for more information.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whicheveroccurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL®

extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 334.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant inyour vehicle.

331

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your retailer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listedin this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 432 for more information.

332

Checking Coolant

The surge tank is located on the driver’sside of the engine compartment. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 314 for moreinformation on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at the COLD FILL line. When your engine iswarm, the level should be at the COLD FILL line ora little higher.

333

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,but only when the engine is cool. See EngineOverheating on page 334 for instructions on “Howto Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

If you need to replace your coolant surge tankpressure cap, see your retailer.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage and acoolant temperature warning light on your vehicle’sinstrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 174 and EngineCoolant Temperature Warning Light on page 173.

334

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineIf you get an engine overheat warning, but seeor hear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on,turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

3. Try to minimize engine load. If you are in atraffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise,shift to the highest gear possible while driving.

335

If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout ten minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Electric Engine FanB. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap

2.2L L4 Engine shown, 3.5L V6 Engine similar

336

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.If it is not, you may have a leak at the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump,or somewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.



Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fanis running. If the engine is overheating, thefan should be running. If it is not, your vehicleneeds service. Turn off the engine.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

337

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not at the COLDFILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it. See Engine Coolant onpage 331 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

338

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolantand the proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

339

1. You can remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure capand upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout one-quarter of a turn.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.This will allow any pressure still left to bevented out the discharge hose.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the COLDFILL line.

340

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the levelis lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the COLD FILL line.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight.

Check the level in the surge tank when the coolingsystem has cooled down. If the coolant is notat the proper level, repeat Steps 1 through 3 andreinstall the pressure cap. If the coolant still isnot at the proper level when the system coolsdown again, see your retailer.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield or rear windowwasher fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’sinstructions before use. If you will be operatingyour vehicle in an area where the temperature mayfall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.

341

Adding Windshield Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 314for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for fluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if it iscompletely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damagethe vehicle’s windshield washer systemand paint.

342

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 314 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have thebrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later the brakes will not work well.

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you addfluid when the linings are worn, then you will havetoo much fluid when you get new brake linings.You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brakewarning light will come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 170.

343

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 432.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well.This could cause a crash. Always use theproper brake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 402.

344

Brake WearYour vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drumbrakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except whenyou are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities and Specificationson page 414.

The rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators,but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise,have the rear brake linings inspected immediately.Also, the rear brake drums should be removedand inspected each time the tires are removed forrotation or changing. When you have the frontbrake pads replaced, have the rear brakesinspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

345

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height or if there is arapid increase in pedal travel. This could bea sign that brake service might be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a moderate brake stop,the brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely makea moderate or heavier stop, then the brakes mightnot adjust correctly. If you drive in that way,then — very carefully — make a few moderatebrake stops about every 1,000 miles (1 600 km),so the brakes will adjust properly.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality brake parts. When you replace partsof the braking system — for example, when thebrake linings wear down and you need newones put in — be sure you get new approvedreplacement parts. If you do not, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example, if someone puts inbrake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, thebalance between the front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

346

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 314 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keep thebattery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 348 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

347

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

348

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that arenot needed. This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it could savethe radio!

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle andlocate the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on that vehicle.Open the hood on your vehicle and find theremote positive (+) and remote negative (−)jump starting terminals.

A. Remote PositiveB. Remote Negative

Vehicles equipped with the 2.2L L4 engine,the remote positive (+) terminal is locatedin the engine compartment on the driver’s sideof the vehicle, on the underhood fuse block.See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 314 for more information on location.Access the remote positive (+) terminalby removing the fuse block cover.The remote negative (−) terminal is the lifthook, which is located towards the rear of theengine on the driver’s side.

2.2L L4 Engine

349

A. Remote NegativeB. Positive Terminal

Vehicle equipped with the 3.5L V6 engine, thepositive (+) terminal is located in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicleon the battery. The negative (−) terminal islocated in the engine compartment onthe driver’s side of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 314 for moreinformation on location.

After unsnapping and opening the black capon the positive (+) terminal on the top ofthe battery, clamp the jumper cable tothe terminal.Place the negative (-) jumper cable clamp onthe nut on the end of the engine.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

3.5L V6 Engine

350

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)or you will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

351

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery. Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anythinguntil the next step. The other end of thenegative (−) cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable away from the dead battery, but notnear engine parts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there, and thechance of sparks getting back to the battery ismuch less.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)terminal for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Press the unlock symbol on the remotekeyless entry transmitter to disarm yoursecurity system, if equipped.

12. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

352

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the underhood fuse block cover to itsoriginal position, if applicable.

All-Wheel DriveIf you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure toperform the lubricant checks described in thissection. There are two additional systemsthat need lubrication.

Jumper Cable Removal

353

Transfer Case (3.5L V6 Engine)When to Check and Change LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the lubricant and when tochange it. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 420.

How to Check Lubricant

A. Fill PlugB. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the transfer case, you’ll need toadd some lubricant. Add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.A fluid loss could indicate a problem; checkand have it repaired, if needed.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 432.

354

Headlamp AimingThe visual optical headlamp aiming system hasbeen preset at the factory and should needno further adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident,the aim of the headlamps may be affected andadjustment may be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams atyou, this may mean the vertical aim of yourheadlamps needs to be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to yourdealer/retailer for service if the headlamps needto be adjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim theheadlamps as described.

The vehicle should be properly preparedas follows:

• The vehicle should be placed so theheadlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a lightcolored wall.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on a levelsurface which is level all the way to the wall.

• The vehicle should be placed so it isperpendicular to the wall or other flat surface.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, ormud on it.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled and allother work stopped while headlamp aiming isbeing performed.

• The vehicle should be normally loaded with afull tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs(75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

• The spare tire is in its proper location inthe vehicle.

Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’slow-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlampswill be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlampsare aimed properly.

355

To adjust the vertical aim:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 313 for more information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of thelow-beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from the ground to theaim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Recordthe distance.

4. At the wall measure from the groundupward (A) to the recorded distancefrom Step 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wallthe width of the vehicle at the height of themark in Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improvebeam cut-off when aiming. Covering aheadlamp may cause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to the headlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place apiece of cardboard or equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being adjusted. This allowsonly the beam of light from the headlampbeing adjusted to be seen on the flat surface.

356

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,which are under the hood near each headlampassembly.The adjustment screw can be turned with a6 mm socket.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw untilthe headlamp beam is aimed to thehorizontal tape line. Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise or lower the angleof the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp ispositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on the left (A) showsthe correct headlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the oppositeheadlamp.

357

Bulb ReplacementFor the type of bulb to use, see ReplacementBulbs on page 364.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

Headlamps

A. Parking/Turn Signal LampB. Low-beam Headlamp/Daytime Running

Lamp (DRL)C. High-beam Headlamp

358

To replace one of the headlamp bulbs, use thefollowing procedure. To replace the parking/turnsignal lamp bulb, see Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps on page 361.

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 313 for more information.

2. Remove the two screws from the top of thefront fascia and grille. They are inboard ofthe headlamp assembly.

3. Remove the two screws retaining theheadlamp assembly.

359

4. Insert a flat blade tool through the opening inthe top. Make sure the tool fits through theopening in the headlamp bracket lower arm.

5. Push the locking tab toward the rear of thevehicle with the tool to lift the headlampbracket lower arm.

6. Pull back on the front fascia and then pull theheadlamp assembly out from the vehicle. Youmay need someone to assist you with this step.

7. Disconnect the electrical connector from thebulb assembly.

8. Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise toremove it from the housing.

9. Replace the old bulb with a new one.10. Reverse Steps 1 through 8 to reinstall.

360

Front Turn Signal andParking LampsTo replace a front turn signal or parking lampbulb, do the following:

1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 under Headlampson page 358 to access the front turn signalor parking lamp.

2. Turn the bulb to be replaced counterclockwiseto remove it from the headlamp assembly.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket assembly.

4. Push the new bulb into the bulb socketassembly.

5. Insert the bulb assembly into the headlampassembly.

6. Turn the bulb assembly clockwise untilseated.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlampassembly.

361

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)To replace a CHMSL bulb, do the following:

1. Remove the center high-mounted stoplamp(CHMSL) fasteners from the outside of thevehicle.

2. Pull the CHMSL out of the liftgate.

3. Disconnect the rear washer hose from therear washer nozzle.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector fromthe CHMSL.

5. Depress the tabs on the CHMSL lens toseparate the CHMSL bulb from theCHMSL lens.

6. Pull the CHMSL bulb out of the assembly.

7. Replace the old bulb with a new one.

8. Align the tabs on the CHMSL lens with theCHMSL bulb assembly, and push to install.

9. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall theCHMSL assembly.

362

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up LampsTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 103 formore information.

2. Remove the two screws retaining the taillampassembly.

3. Slide the taillampassembly rearwardand away fromthe vehicle.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector andremove it from the taillamp assembly.

5. Turn the bulb socket being replacedcounterclockwise to disconnect it.

6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.

7. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.

8. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 to reinstall thetaillamp assembly.

363

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws holding each ofthe license plate lamps to the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the

license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb NumberBack-up 3156CHMSL W5WFront Turn Signal/Parking 3157KHeadlamps

High-beam 9005 or HB3Low-beam/DRL 9006 or HB4

Rear Turn Signal, Stoplamp andTaillamp 3057

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer/retailer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 420 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For proper type andlength, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 434.

364

To replace the windshield wiper blade assemblydo the following:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage thehook and push the wiper arm (A) out of theblade (C).

3. Push the new wiper blade securely on thewiper arm until you hear the release leverclick into place.

To replace the rear wiper blade, follow the stepslisted above.

365

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your Saturn Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 279.

• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.



Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 374.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

Low-Profile Performance Tire(Red Line)If your vehicle has P245/50R18 size tires, they areclassified as low-profile performance tires. Thesetires are designed for very responsive driving onwet or dry pavement. You may also notice moreroad noise with low-profile performance tires andthat they tend to wear faster.

366

Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,they are more susceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damagecan occur when coming into contact withroad hazards like, potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into a curb. YourSaturn Warranty does not cover this type ofdamage. Keep tires set to the correct inflationpressure and, when possible avoid contactwith curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

367

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 380.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit: Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

368

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.If your vehicle has a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire on page 398 andIf a Tire Goes Flat on page 385.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 374.

Compact Spare Tire Example

369

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the first character in the tire size

means a passenger vehicle tire engineeredto standards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent ashigh as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheelin inches.

370

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 374.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 279.

371

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 279.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

372

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 374 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 279.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 377.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 380.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 279.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 279.

373

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to support yourvehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tire and Loading Information label,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 279. How youload your vehicle affects vehicle handling andride comfort. Never load your vehicle with moreweight than it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 398.

374

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 377and Wheel Replacement on page 382 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 420.

375

When towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground, the vehicle’s odometer willnot record the miles generated while towing.Keep a record of how many miles your vehiclewas towed so they can be added to the mileageon the vehicle’s odometer when following yourmaintenance schedule for recommended services.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in yourtire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 279.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 414.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 386.

376

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

377

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 367 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,



brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle.See Compact Spare Tire on page 398.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

378

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires, thismay affect the way your vehicle performs, includingits braking, ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally,if your vehicle has electronic systems such as,anti-lock brakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol, the performance of these systems canbe affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use Saturn specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aSaturn certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 377 andAccessories and Modifications on page 304 foradditional information.

379

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

380

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

381

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See your dealer/retailerif any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

382

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew Saturn original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 386 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newSaturn original equipment wheel.

383

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P235/65R16, P235/60R17, or P245/50R18 size tires, do not usetire chains. They can damage your vehiclebecause there is not enough clearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension, or othervehicle parts. The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and you or others may beinjured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only ifits manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid



damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,readjust, or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinyour wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the front tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other thanP235/65R16, P235/60R17, or P245/50R18 sizetires, use tire chains only where legal and onlywhen you must. Use only SAE Class “S” typechains that are the proper size for your tires.Install them on the front tires and tighten themas tightly as possible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and follow the chainmanufacturer’s instructions. If you can hearthe chains contacting your vehicle, stop andretighten them. If the contact continues, slowdown until it stops. Driving too fast or spinningthe wheels with chains on will damage yourvehicle.

384

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop wellout of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Get the vehicle under control by steering theway you want the vehicle to go. It may be verybumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

385

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour hazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transaxle shift leverin PARK (P), or shift a manualtransaxle to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).



3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When you have a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

386

The following information will tell you how to usethe jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe tools you will need are located on thedriver’s side of the rear cargo area. To access thetools, do the following:

1. Remove thewing-bolt fromthe jack.

2. Remove the jack and wheel wrench.

3. Remove the straps holding the bag containingthe wheel wrench. Then remove the wheelwrench from the bag.

4. Fold out the socket portion of the wrench fromthe handle.

387

To access the spare tire, do the following:

1. Lift the forward floor panel of the load floorcargo organizer.

2. Remove the forward floor panel of the loadfloor cargo organizer and place it in thevehicle while you are removing the spare tire.

388

3. Open the floor cargo organizer locks, locatedon the top left and right corners of theorganizer, by pushing inward on them.

4. Remove the load floor cargo organizer.

389

5. Remove the wheel retainer bolt holding downthe spare tire by turning it counterclockwise.

6. Remove the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 398 for more information.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A)and wheel wrench (B).

390

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireThe wheel cover or hubcap needs to be removedin order to reach the wheel bolts.

For steel wheels with full plastic covers andaluminum wheels with large circular center caps,do the following:

1. It is recommended that a safety check is donebefore preceding. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 386 for more information.

2. Loosen all plasticcaps by turning thewheel wrenchcounterclockwise.Do not try to removeplastic caps fromthe cover orcenter cap.

3. Pull the cover or center cap away from thewheel and place it in the trunk.

When reinstalling full plastic covers or centercaps, tighten all the plastic caps hand snug, thentighten with the wheel wrench an additionalone-quarter of a turn.

1. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheelnuts. Do not remove them yet.

2. Attach the wheelwrench to the jackbolt head androtate the wheelwrench clockwise.That will raise the lifthead a little.

391

3. Position the lift head at the jack locationnearest the flat tire. Make sure all of thejack lift head is touching the jacking flangeunder the body. Do not place the jack under abody panel. The lower body panel has anarrow to aid in locating the jacking location.

4. Put the compact spare tire near you.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

392

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head isin the correct position or you may damage yourvehicle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty.

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough room forthe road tire to be removed.

393

6. Remove all of thewheel nuts.

7. Take off the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When changing a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from the places wherethe wheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towel canbe used to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

394

8. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces andspare wheel.

9. Place the compact spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.Because the nuts might come loose. Thevehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

10. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut byhand until the wheel is held against the hub.

11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise.

395

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 414for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 414 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

12. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown.

13. Lower the jack all the way and remove thejack from under the vehicle.

14. Tighten the bolts firmly with the wheel wrench.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourvehicle’s compact spare. If you try to put awheel cover on the compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

396

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

To store the flat or spare tire and tools, do thefollowing:

1. Place the wheel wrench into the bag and usethe straps to secure the bag to the fullycollapsed jack.

2. Install the jack in thedriver’s side panel ofthe rear cargoarea and securewith the wing bolt.

3. Remove the wheel stow rod from the upperleft side of the floor compartment.

397

4. Screw the threaded wheel stow rod onto thespare tire bracket. The final position of thewheel stow rod must be rotated to the farthestforward position so that the top of the rodfaces forward.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 under Removingthe Spare Tire and Tools on page 387 toreplace the floor cargo organizer and lockin place.

6. Place the flat, or damaged tire, face down, onthe load floor with the threaded wheel stowrod sticking up through the center hole of theload floor and center hole of the wheel.Vehicles equipped with the 3.5L V6 (L66)engine and aluminum wheels, must remove thecenter cap from the wheel prior to placing it onthe load floor. To remove the center cap, tapthe cap from the backside of the wheel, thenplace the wheel on the load floor.

7. Place the wheel retainer bolt onto the wheelstow rod and tighten.

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and havethe full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best to replace thespare with a full-size tire as soon as possible.The spare tire will last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

398

And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheelwith other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremesof heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require morefrequent cleaning. Use care because newspapersand garments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

399

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your retailer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your retailer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leave aresidue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon(3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents such asnaptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

400

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase glosson your instrument panel. The increase ingloss may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to seethrough the windshield under certain conditions.

401

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 432.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays ofthe sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strongsoaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse thevehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.You can get approved cleaning products from yourretailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials onpage 407. Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives.All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly andnot allowed to dry on the surface, or they couldstain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois oran all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter your vehicle.

402

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 402.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of yourvehicle by hand may be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish. You can get approvedcleaning products from your Saturn retailer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 407.

Your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and madefor a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take their tollover a period of years. You can help to keep thepaint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

403

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield with glasscleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth orpaper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid ora mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughlywhen cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime,sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatmentsmay cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiperblades if they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

Aluminum WheelsNotice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trimmay be damaged if you do not wash yourvehicle after driving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust. Always washyour vehicle’s chrome with soap and waterafter exposure.Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Use onlyapproved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

404

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damage thealuminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Neverdrive a vehicle equipped with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheetmetal repair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your Saturnretailer. Larger areas of finish damage canbe corrected in your Saturn retailer’s body andpaint shop.

405

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your Saturnretailer or an underbody car washing system cando this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on yourvehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this,we will repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged by this falloutcondition within 12 months or 12,000 miles(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

406

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke, and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one easy step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl, andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather, and carpet.

407

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You cansee it if you look through the windshield fromoutside your vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels andthe certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the rear edge of the driverside rear door. It is very helpful if you everneed to order parts. The label has the followinginformation:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

408

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your retailerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 88.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse panel protect thepower windows and other power accessories.When the current load is too heavy, the circuitbreaker opens and closes, protecting the circuituntil the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by fuses. This greatly reducesthe chance of circuit overload and fire causedby electrical problems.

There are two fuse blocks — the underhood fuseblock, and the instrument panel fuse block.

To identify and check fuses and relays, refer tothe Fuse Usage Chart on the inside surface of thefuse panel door.

409

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The instrument panel fuse block is located on thepassenger’s side of the lower console.

Fuses Usage

CRUISE Cruise Control Switch, Brake Switch

EPS Electronic Power Steering

IGN 1

Instrument Cluster, BrakeTransmission Shift InterlockSolenoid, Traction Switch, FogLamp Switch

LOCK/MIRROR Power Door Locks, Power Mirror,Entry Control

BCM Body Control Module, Front Wipers,Windows, Sunroof

BCM (IGN 1) Body Control Module

AIR BAG Sensing and Diagnostic Module

RADIO (IGN) Radio, Power Mirror, PremiumRadio Amplifier

TURN Turn Lamps

HVAC HVAC Control Head

HAZARD Hazard Lamps

HTD SEATS Heated Seats

RADIO Radio, Data Link Connector

PARK Park Lamps, Taillamps, Side MarkerLamps, License Lamps

410

Fuses Usage

BCM/CLUSTER Body Control Module, InstrumentCluster

INT LTS Body Control Module, OnStar®

DR LKS Door Locks

Relays Usage

AFTER BLOW Not Used

HVACBLOWER HVAC Control Head

PK LP Parking Lamps

DR LCK All Door Lock Switch

PSG DRUNLCK Passenger Door Unlock Switch

DRV DRUNLCK Driver Door Unlock Switch

HDLP Headlamps

Underhood Fuse Block

The underhood fuse block is located in theforward part of the engine compartment nearthe battery.

Fuses Usage

ECM/TCM Battery Voltage to ECM, TCM, PCM(3.5L V6 (L66))

BATT FEED Instrument Panel Fuse Box

HORN Horn

* * Emissions

411

Fuses Usage

ABS PWR Anti-lock Brake System Battery

REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger

COOL HI (L4)/COOL 1 (V6)

Cooling Fans High (L4)/CoolingFan 1 (V6)

FOG LP Fog Lamps

LH HDLP Driver’s Side Headlamp

RR WIPER Rear Wiper

ABS Anti-lock Brake System Module

PWR WDW Power Window Relay and Sunroof

CIGAR/AUX2 Cigarette Lighter

HVACBLOWER HVAC Blower Motor

RH HDLP Right Headlamp

FRT WIPER Front Wiper

ETC Engine Control Module (ECM),Electronic Throttle Control (V6)

SUNROOF Sunroof Module

BRAKE Stoplamps

IGN Ignition switch

Fuses Usage

IGN/INJ (L4),ECM/

CAM (V6)

Engine Ignition Module, FuelInjectors (2.2L L4 (L61))Camshaft Sensor, Main RelayVoltage To PCM, Ignition Coils 1-6

INJECTORS(3.5L V6 (L66)) Fuel Injection

PWR TRAIN

Engine Control Module (ECM),Transaxle Control Module (TCM),Transaxle, L66 Powertrain ControlModule (PCM)

BACKUP

Low Coolant Switch, Backup Lamps(2.2L L4 (L61)), Vehicle SpeedSensor (Manual), Transaxle RangeSwitch (2.2L L4 (L61))

HTD SEATS Heated Seats

COOLLO (L4)/

COOL 2 (V6)

Cooling Fan Low (L4), CoolingFan (V6)

A/C CLUTCH Air Conditioning Clutch, Back UpLamps (3.5L V6 (L66))

FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

AUX 1OUTLET Front Auxiliary Power Outlet

412

Fuses Usage

PREM AUD Premium Radio Amplifier

ABS Anti-lock Brake System Ignition

PWR SEAT Power Seats

Relays Usage

FOG LP Fog Lamps

COOL FANHI (L4) Cooling Fan Motor High

ENG MAINEngine Control Module/CAM,Emissions, Injectors, ElectronicThrottle Control

REAR DEFOG Rear Defog System

HORN Horn

DRL Daytime Running Lamps

COOLFAN 1 (V6) Cooling Fan

WIPERSYSTEM Wiper System

Relays Usage

PRW WDO Power Window Switch, SunroofModule

FRT WIPER Front Wiper System

COOL FANLOW (L4) Cooling Fan Motor Low

A/C CLUTCH Air Conditioning Clutch

BACKUPLAMPS (V6) Back-up Lamps (V6)

FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump System

RR WIPER Rear Wiper System

COOLFAN 2 (V6) Cooling Fan (V6)

Misc. UsageFUSE PULLER Fuse Puller

Diode Air Conditioning Diode

413

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System2.2L L4 Automatic Engine 8.8 qt 8.3 L2.2L L4 Manual Engine 9.1 qt 8.6 L3.5L V6 Engine 10.3 qt 9.7 L

Engine Oil with Filter2.2L L4 Engine 5.0 qt 4.7 L3.5L V6 Engine 4.5 qt 4.3 L

Fuel Tank 16.6 gal 62.8 LTransaxle

Five-Speed Automatic 4.5 qt 4.3 LFive-Speed Automatic AWD 4.1 qt 3.9 LFour-Speed Automatic 7.0 qt 6.6 LFive-Speed Manual 1.7 qt 1.6 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 ft lb 140 YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

414

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

2.2L L4 (L61) D AutomaticManual 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

3.5L V6 (L66) 4 Automatic 0.043 inches (1.1 mm)

415

✍ NOTES

416

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 418Introduction ............................................... 418Maintenance Requirements ........................ 418Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 418Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 418Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 420Additional Required Services ..................... 423Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 425

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 427At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 428At Least Once a Month ............................. 428At Least Once a Year ............................... 429Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 432Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 434Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 435Maintenance Record .................................. 436

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

417

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance might not be coveredby warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps tokeep your vehicle in good working condition, butalso helps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tireinflation can increase the level of emissions fromyour vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at Saturn want to help you keep your vehiclein good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drivevery short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the timein very hot, dusty weather. You may use yourvehicle in making deliveries. Or you may driveit to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.

418

Because of all the different ways people usetheir vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle in good condition, see yourSaturn retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• are driven off-road in the recommendedmanner. See Off-Road Driving on page 247.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 306.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 420 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 423 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 425 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, see your retailer tohave a qualified technician do the work.See Doing Your Own Service Work onpage 305.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should haveyour Saturn retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your Saturn retailer for yourservice needs, you will know that Saturn-trainedand supported service technicians will perform thework using genuine Saturn parts.

419

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 453.

Owner Checks and Services on page 427 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehiclein good condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 432 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 434.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. We recommend the useof genuine Saturn parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the Change Engine Oil light comes on, itmeans that service is required for your vehicle.Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions, theengine oil life system may not indicate that vehicleservice is necessary for over a year. However, theengine oil and filter must be changed at least oncea year and at this time the system must be reset.Your Saturn retailer has Saturn-trained servicetechnicians who will perform this work usinggenuine Saturn parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 323 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

420

When the Change Engine Oil light appears,certain services, checks, and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in thefollowing for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your firstservice be Maintenance I, your second servicebe Maintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II maybe required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theChange Engine Oil light comes on within 10months since the vehicle was purchased orMaintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the lightcomes on 10 months or more since the last serviceor if the light has not come on at all for one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 318. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 323. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 324. See footnote (l). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 375 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 428.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

421

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluidas needed. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

Automatic Transaxle Only: Check automatic transaxle fluid level andadd fluid as needed. •

Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (k). •

L4 engine: Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g). •

422

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 324. • • •

L4 engine: Change automatic transaxlefluid (severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

L4 engine: Change automatic transaxlefluid (normal service). •

V6 engine: Change automatic transaxlefluid (severe service). See footnote (h). • • • • • •

V6 engine: Change automatic transaxlefluid (normal service). See footnote (m). • •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

423

Additional Required Services (cont’d)


50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

V6 engine: Replace timing belt (normalservice). An Emission Control Service.See footnote †.

•

V6 engine: Replace timing belt (severeservice). An Emission Control Service.See footnotes † and (n).

• • •

L4 engine: Change rear drive moduleand power takeoff unit fluid (severeservice). See footnote (h).

• • •

L4 engine: Change rear drive moduleand power takeoff unit fluid (normalservice).

•

V6 engine: Change transfer assemblyfluid (severe service). See footnote (h). • • • • • •

V6 engine: Change transfer assemblyfluid (normal service). See footnote (m). • •

V6 engine: Change rear drive modulefluid (severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

V6 engine: Change rear drive modulefluid (normal service). •

424

Additional Required Services (cont’d)


50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

V6 engine: Inspect valve clearance. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (p).

•

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined thatthe failure to perform this maintenance item will notnullify the emission warranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however, urge that all recommendedmaintenance services be performed at the indicatedintervals and the maintenance be recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear androtors for surface condition. Inspect drum brakelinings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect otherbrake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

425

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace withgenuine Saturn parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appearworn or damaged or that streak or miss areasof the windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might keep a safety beltsystem from doing its job, have it repaired. Haveany torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also lookfor any opened or broken airbag coverings, andhave them repaired or replaced. The airbag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hingesand latches, hood hinges and latches, glove boxhinges, sunroof (if equipped), and any foldingseat hardware. More frequent lubrication may be

required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Check system for interference or bindingand for damaged or missing parts. Replaceparts as needed. Replace any components thathave high effort or excessive wear.

(h) Severe service is when the vehicle is mainlydriven under one or more of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour retailer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 331 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

426

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(k) Or every 12 months, whichever occurs first.If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(m) Change the fluid the first time the vehicleis serviced after 100,000 miles (166 000 km)and when the vehicle is serviced after eachsubsequent 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

(n) Severe service is when the vehicle is mainlydriven under one or more of these conditions:

− In very high temperatures — over110°F (43°C).

− In very low temperatures — under-20°F (-29°C).

− When doing frequent trailer towing.

(p) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your Saturn retailercan assist you with these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completedat once. Whenever any fluids or lubricantsare added to your vehicle, make sure they arethe proper ones, as shown in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 432.

427

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 318 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check the engineoil regularly and keep it at the proper level.Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to the engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 331 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckInspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure theyare inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forgetto check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 374. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 386.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 375.

428

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection,the vehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake andthe regular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 119.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediatelyif it starts.

3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to startthe engine in each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If thevehicle starts in any other position, contactyour Saturn retailer for service.On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shiftlever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to start the engine.The vehicle should start only when the clutchpedal is pushed down all the way to the floor.If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down, contact your Saturnretailer for service.

429

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection,the vehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 119.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shift lever outof PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of PARK (P), contact your Saturnretailer for service.

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set,try to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• With an automatic transaxle, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK only when the shift leveris in PARK (P). The ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK.

• With a manual transaxle, the ignition keyshould come out only in LOCK.

Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.

430

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take careto clean thoroughly any areas where mud and otherdebris can collect.

431

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil(2.2L L4engine)

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 318.

Engine Oil(3.5L V6engine)

Engine oil which displays theAmerican Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 318.


Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 331.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Optikleen® Washer Solvent

Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

HydraulicClutch System

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluidor equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid(Saturn Part No. 21013073).

ManualTransaxle

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,in Canada 88861801).

AutomaticTransaxle (with2.2L L4 engine)

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

432


AutomaticTransaxle (with3.5L V6 engine)

ATF Z1 Automatic TransmissionFluid (Saturn Part No. 22717466).

Rear DriveModule and

Power TransferUnit (exceptwith 3.5L V6

engine)

VERSATRAK® Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 12378514,in Canada 88901045).

Rear DriveModule (with

3.5L V6 engine)

VERSATRAK® Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 12378514,in Canada 88901045).

Transfer Case(with 3.5L V6

engine)

Synthetic Axle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455).

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).


Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch,Pivots, SpringAnchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(Saturn Part No. 21038869 orGM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood, LiftgateDoor, and Rear

Folding SeatHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Sunroof Track

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(Saturn Part No. 21038869 orGM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

433

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourretailer.

Part Saturn Part Number ACDelco® Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22676970 A1627C

Engine Oil Filter

2.2L L4 12605566 PF457G

3.5L V6 12582255 —

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 15822812 —

Spark Plugs

2.2L L4 12607280 41-105

3.5L V6 12582002 —

Wiper Blades

Driver’s Side – 24 inches (60.0 cm) 22703508 —

Passenger’s Side – 19 inches (47.5 cm) 22703507 —

Rear – 11.0 inches (28.0 cm) 22665007 —

434

Engine Drive Belt RoutingIf your vehicle has a hybrid engine, see “EngineDrive Belt Routing” in the Saturn Vue HybridOwners Manual.

2.2L L4 (L61) Engine

3.5L V6 (L66) Engine

435

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirementson page 418. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 427 can be addedon the following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

436

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



437

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



438

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 440Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 440Online Owner Center ................................. 443Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 444Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 444GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 445Roadside Assistance Program ................... 445Collision Damage Repair ........................... 448

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 452Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 452Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 453Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ............ 453Service Publications Ordering Information ... 453

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ......... 455Event Data Recorders ............................... 455OnStar ...................................................... 456Navigation System ..................................... 456Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ......... 456

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

439

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your retailer and to Saturn. Together weare committed to providing our customers withunparalleled service, before, during, and after thepurchase of a Saturn vehicle, for total customersatisfaction. We call this the Saturn Difference.Normally, any concerns with the sales transactionor the operation of your vehicle are resolved byyour retailer’s sales or service departments. If,for any reason, your ownership experiencefalls below your expectations, we suggestyou take the following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the Retail CustomerAssistance Liaison. Any member of the retailmanagement team has the authority and thedesire to resolve your concerns. Normally,concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.

STEP TWO: Should you need additionalassistance, in the U.S., contact the SaturnCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact theSaturn Customer Communication Centre at1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter team member will handle your calland assist in providing product and warrantyinformation, the nearest retailer location, roadsideassistance, brochures, literature and discuss anyconcerns you may have.

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to give theCustomer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This17-digit number can be found on the vehicleregistration or title, on the upper driver sidecorner of the dash, or on your roadsideassistance key card.

• The name of your selling and servicing retailfacility.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.

440

When contacting Saturn, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn andits retailers are committed to making sure youare completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle.However, if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, Saturn and its retailers offer theadditional assistance of a neutral party throughour voluntary participation in a mediation/arbitrationprogram called Better Business Bureau (BBB)Auto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This programis available at no cost to you, our customer.

Although you may be required to resort to thisinformal dispute resolution program prior to filing acourt action, use of the program is free of chargeand your case is generally heard within 40 days.If you do not agree with the decision given in yourcase, you can reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using thetoll-free telephone number or by writing them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states andthe District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and other factors. SaturnCorporation reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

441

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation in theMediation/Arbitration ProgramIn the event that you do not feel yourconcerns have been addressed after followingthe procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantages overcourts in most jurisdictions because it isinformal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibilityin the Canadian Motor Vehicle ArbitrationPlan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the Saturn CustomerCommunication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, oryou may write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

442

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturnownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members.

Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updatedinformation and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

443

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist owners who have hearingdifficulties, Saturn has installed special TDD(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)equipment in its Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter.

Any hearing- or speech-impaired customerwho has access to a TDD or to a conventionalText Telephone (TTY) can communicate withSaturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY usersin Canada may dial 1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance OfficesSaturn encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a customer wishes to writeto Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:

Saturn Customer Assistance Center100 Saturn ParkwayMail Code 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

1-800-553-60001-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000

In Canada, write to:

Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada Ltd.CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-19991-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

444

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligibleaftermarket driver or passenger adaptiveequipment you may require for your vehicle suchas hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.

The offer is available for a limited period of timefrom the date of vehicle purchase/lease.

For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the SaturnCustomer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.

In Canada, customers may call theSaturn Customer Communication Centreat 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in Canadamay call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramFor vehicles purchased in the U.S., call1-800-553-6000 (TTY: 1-800-833-6000).

For vehicles purchased in Canada, call1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Saturn RoadsideAssistance Program.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,a person driving this vehicle without the consentof the owner is not eligible for coverage.

445

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period andin Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 Canada). Service to providediesel may be restricted. For safety reasons,propane and other alternative fuels arenot provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present personal identificationbefore lock-out service is provided. In Canada,the vehicle registration is also required.Lock-out service is covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.A remote unlock may be available if you havean active OnStar® subscription.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadwayor Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturnretailer for warranty service or in the eventof a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance provided when the vehicle is miredin sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire ingood condition, when equipped and properlyinflated is covered at no charge. The customeris responsible for the repair or replacement ofthe tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start are covered at nocharge.

• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Uponrequest, Roadside Assistance will send youdetailed, computer personalized maps,highlighting your choice of either the mostdirect route or the most scenic route to yourdestination, anywhere in North America, alongwith helpful travel information pertaining toyour trip.We make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestsare limited to six per calendar year.

446

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance(Canada only): In the event of a warrantyrelated vehicle disablement, while en route andover 250 kilometres from the original point ofdeparture, you might qualify for trip interruptionexpense assistance. This assistance coversreasonable reimbursement of up to a maximumof $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,and a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim fortrip interruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service (Canada only): Therecould be times when Roadside Assistancecannot provide timely assistance. Your advisormay authorize you to secure local emergency

road service, and you will be reimbursed up to$100 upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Saturn’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty for U.S. customers, and the durationof the Base Warranty Coverage for Canadiancustomers of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.However, any cost for parts and labor fornon-warranty repairs are the responsibilityof the driver.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representatives:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number

• Telephone number of your location

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and license plate number

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

447

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember we are onlya phone call away. Saturn Roadside Assistance:1-800-553-6000 ; text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-6000. Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.

Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessivein frequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Saturn and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changesor discontinue the Roadside Assistance programat any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains or other traction devices.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

448

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle was originallybuilt. Genuine GM Collision parts are your bestchoice to assure that your vehicle’s designedappearance, durability, and safety are preserved.The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintainyour GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may alsobe used for repair. These parts are typicallyremoved from vehicles that were total losses inprior accidents. In most cases, the parts beingrecycled are from undamaged sections of thevehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,may be an acceptable choice to maintain yourvehicle’s originally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these parts isnot known. Such parts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any relatedfailures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GMand may not have been tested for your vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibitpremature durability/corrosion problems, and maynot perform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts are not covered bythat warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your Saturn retailermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

449

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the quality ofcoverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switching toanother insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read yourlease carefully, as you may be charged atthe end of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sureyou are all right. If you are uninjured,make sure that no one else in your vehicle,or the other vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move itby a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This helps guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GMRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 445 for moreinformation.

450

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service is taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator or write down thedriver’s name, the service’s name, and thephone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general descriptionof the damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they need. If they askfor a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurance

laws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a Saturnretailer or a private collision repair facility to fixthe damage, make sure you are comfortablewith them. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify to the facilitythat any required replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, either new GenuineGM parts or recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts are not covered byyour GM vehicle warranty.

451

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company may initially value therepair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased youmay be obligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repairvaluation based on that insurance company’scollision policy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company. In such cases,you can have control of the repair and parts choicesas long as cost stays within reasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it couldopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it couldorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your retailer or SaturnCorporation.

To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

452

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe thatyour vehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects to SaturnIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify us.

U.S. customers can call the Saturn CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-553-6000, or write:

Saturn Corporation100 Saturn ParkwayMail Drop 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-1999.Or, write to:

Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformationService ManualsA variety of publications are available to you.Saturn service manuals are written for trainedtechnicians, and in some cases, specialized toolsand equipment are necessary to complete certainrepairs. However, the manuals are available toowners who either have the training, or wish to gaina greater understanding of the technical aspect oftheir Saturn.For additional publications information orto order publications in the United States,call toll free 1-800-2-SATURN or visitwww.saturn-publications.com to order on-line.In Canada, Saturn service manuals are availableby calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.

453

Owner PublicationsInformation on how to obtain product bulletinsand as described below is applicable only in thefifty U.S. states and the District of Columbia,and only for cars and light trucks with a GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) less than10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of individualbulletins are also at your participating Saturnretailer. You can ask to see them.

In Canada, information relating to product servicebulletins can be obtained by contacting yourSaturn retailer.

Service BulletinsSaturn regularly sends its retailers useful servicebulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitorsproduct performance in the field. We thenprepare bulletins for servicing our productsbetter. You can get these bulletins, too.

Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertainto the proper use and care of your vehicle.Some describe costly repairs. Others describeinexpensive repairs which, if done on time withthe latest parts, may avoid future costly repairs.

Some bulletins tell a technician how to repaira new or unexpected condition. Others describea quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can help atechnician service your vehicle better.

Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting asmall number of vehicles. Your Saturn retaileror a qualified technician may have to determineif a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle.To order Saturn bulletins, call SaturnPublications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visitwww.saturn-publications.com to order online.

454

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about thevehicle’s performance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle uses computer modulesto monitor and control engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy airbags in a crash and,if so equipped, to provide anti-lock braking to helpthe driver control the vehicle. These modules maystore data to help your dealer/retailer technicianservice your vehicle. Some modules may also storedata about how you operate the vehicle, such asrate of fuel consumption or average speed. Thesemodules may also retain the owner’s personalpreferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersSome information about your vehicle’s performanceand how it is driven may be recorded on variousmodules if a crash occurs. Some people refer tothese modules as event data recorders (EDRs).These modules may record several seconds ofpre-crash and crash data, such as data relatedto engine speed, brake application, throttleposition, vehicle speed, yaw rate, steeringwheel angle, lateral acceleration, safety beltusage, airbag readiness, airbag performanceand the severity of the collision. Unlike the flightdata recorders on airplanes, these modules do notrecord sounds or conversations.

To retrieve this data, special equipment andaccess to the vehicle or the module that storesthe data are required. Certain data may also besent to or retrieved by OnStar® (see below).GM will not access this information or share it withothers except: with the consent of the vehicle owneror, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee; in response to an official request of police or

455

similar government office; as part of GM’s defenseof litigation through the discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GM collects or receivesmay also be used for GM research needs or may bemade available to others for research purposes,where a need is shown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

Others may be able to retrieve this data if theyhave access to the vehicle and have the specialequipment necessary to download the data.

OnStarIf your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribeto the OnStar® services, please refer to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions for informationon data collection and use. See also OnStar®

System on page 128 for more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system,use of the system may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephone numbers,and other trip information. Please refer tothe navigation system operating manual forinformation on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in some vehicles forfunctions such as tire pressure monitoringand ignition system security, as well as inconnection with conveniences such as key fobsfor remote door locking/unlocking and starting,and in-vehicle transmitters for garage dooropeners. RFID technology in GM vehiclesdoes not use or record personal informationor link with any other GM system containingpersonal information.

456

AAbout Driving Your Vehicle .............................. 3Accessories and Modifications ..................... 304Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 89Additives, Fuel ............................................ 307Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 409Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 324Air Conditioning ........................................... 155Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 166Readiness Light ....................................... 165

Airbag System ............................................... 71What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 80When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 77Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 75

Airbag SystemsAdding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 89How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 80Passenger Sensing System ....................... 82Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 88What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 79

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 353All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System .................... 239

Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 225Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System .................................................... 225Anti-Lock Brake System .............................. 235Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 171Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 404Care of Safety Belts ................................ 402Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 406Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 403Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 399Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 400Finish Care .............................................. 403Finish Damage ......................................... 405Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 401Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 405Tires ........................................................ 405Underbody Maintenance ........................... 406Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 407Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 402Weatherstrips ........................................... 402Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 404

Audio System .............................................. 182Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 223Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 225Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 225

457

Audio System (cont.)Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 225Radio with CD ................................ 186, 192Setting the Time .............................. 183, 184Understanding Radio Reception ............... 224XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 225

Audio System(s)Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 202

Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 151Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ............................................... 327, 328Operation ................................................. 114

BBattery ........................................................ 347

Run-Down Protection ............................... 154Battery Warning Light .................................. 169Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 269Brake

Emergencies ............................................ 237Parking .................................................... 119

Brakes ........................................................ 343System Warning Light .............................. 170

Braking ....................................................... 234Braking in Emergencies ............................... 237Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 109

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 358Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) ............................... 362Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ...... 361Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 358Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 355Headlamps ............................................... 358License Plate Lamps ................................ 364Replacement Bulbs .................................. 364Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ..................................... 363Buying New Tires ........................................ 377

CCalibration ................................................... 125California Fuel ............................................. 307California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 305Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 414Carbon Monoxide ...................... 123, 272, 290Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 402Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 225Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 225

Cargo Area ................................................. 132CD, MP3 ..................................................... 202

458

Center Console Storage Area ...................... 132Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ..... 362Chains, Tire ................................................. 384Check

Engine Light ............................................ 175Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 312Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 406Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 49Infants and Young Children ........................ 45Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 55Older Children ........................................... 42Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Outside Seat Position .................... 61Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Rear Seat Position ...................... 64Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 66Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 53

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 155Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 404Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 403Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 400Finish Care .............................................. 403Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 399

Cleaning (cont.)Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 401Tires ........................................................ 405Underbody Maintenance ........................... 406Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 402Weatherstrips ........................................... 402Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 404

Climate Control System ............................... 155Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 159Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 159

Clock .................................................. 183, 184Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 331Collision Damage Repair ............................. 448Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 39Compact Spare Tire .................................... 398Compass ..................................................... 125Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 107Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 234Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 174Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 173Heater, Engine ......................................... 113Low Warning Light ................................... 174Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 334

Cooling System ........................................... 336

459

Cruise Control ............................................. 146Cupholder(s) ................................................ 132Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users ......................... 444

Customer Assistance Offices .................... 444Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 440GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 445Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn .......... 453Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 453Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 452Roadside Assistance Program .................. 445Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 453

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 150Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ....... 180Defensive Driving ........................................ 230Delayed Locking .......................................... 101Disc, MP3 ................................................... 202Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 305Dome Lamp ................................................ 153

DoorDelayed Locking ...................................... 101Locks ....................................................... 100Power Door Locks ................................... 101Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 101Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 102

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 26Seat Height Adjuster .................................. 10

Driver Behavior ........................................... 228Driving

At Night ................................................... 262City .......................................................... 267Defensive ................................................. 230Drunken ................................................... 231Environment ............................................. 229Freeway ................................................... 268Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 270In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 264Off-Road .................................................. 247Recovery Hook ........................................ 277Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 277Winter ...................................................... 272

DVDRear Seat Entertainment System ............. 211

460

EEDR ............................................................ 455Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 409Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 409Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 410Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 409Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 411Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 409

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 324Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 179Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 175Coolant .................................................... 331Coolant Heater ......................................... 113Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 174Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 173Drive Belt Routing .................................... 435Engine Compartment Overview ................ 314Exhaust ................................................... 123Oil ........................................................... 318Oil Life System ........................................ 323Overheating ............................................. 334Reduced Power Light ............................... 179

Engine (cont.)Running While Parked ............................. 124Starting .................................................... 111

Entry Lighting .............................................. 153Event Data Recorders ................................. 455Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 41

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 324Finish Damage ............................................ 405Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 225Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 142Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 144Flat Tire ...................................................... 385Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 386Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 397Fluid

Manual Transaxle ..................................... 330Windshield Washer .................................. 341

Fog LampFog .......................................................... 152

Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 18Folding Seatback, Passenger ........................ 16Footwell Lamps ........................................... 153

461

Front Console Storage Area ........................ 132Fuel ............................................................ 306

Additives .................................................. 307California Fuel .......................................... 307Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 311Filling Your Tank ...................................... 309Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 308Gage ....................................................... 181Gasoline Octane ...................................... 306Gasoline Specifications ............................ 306Low Warning Light ................................... 181

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 409Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 410Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 411Windshield Wiper ..................................... 409

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 174Fuel ......................................................... 181Speedometer ........................................... 163Tachometer .............................................. 164

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 306Specifications ........................................... 306

Gate Ajar Light ............................................ 180Glove Box ................................................... 132GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 445

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 142Head Restraints ............................................ 15Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 355Headlamps ......................................... 149, 358

Bulb Replacement .................................... 358Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 150Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 144Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ...... 361Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 358High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 144

Heated Seats ................................................ 11Heater ......................................................... 155Height Adjuster, Driver Seat .......................... 10Highbeam On Light ..................................... 180Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 270Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 270Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 312Release ................................................... 313

462

Horn ............................................................ 142How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 25Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 331

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 109Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 45Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 374Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 140Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 152Cluster ..................................................... 162

Interior Lamps ............................................. 152

JJump Starting .............................................. 348

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 96Keys ............................................................. 95

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 367Lamps

Dome ....................................................... 153Footwell ................................................... 153Map ......................................................... 153

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 55

License Plate Lamps ................................... 364Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide ..................................... 103Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 165Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 171Battery Warning ....................................... 169Brake System Warning ............................. 170Change Engine Oil ................................... 179Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ............ 180Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 173Gate Ajar ................................................. 180Highbeam On .......................................... 180Low Coolant Warning ............................... 174Low Fuel Warning .................................... 181Low Traction ............................................ 173Malfunction Indicator ................................ 175Oil Pressure ............................................. 178

463

Light (cont.)Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 166Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 165Reduced Engine Power ............................ 179Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 164Security ................................................... 179Service Vehicle Soon ............................... 180TCS Warning Light .................................. 172Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning ................................................ 172Up-Shift ................................................... 169

LightingEntry ........................................................ 153

Lights .......................................................... 149Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 144High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 144Interior Lamps .......................................... 152

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 279Lockout Protection ....................................... 103Locks

Delayed Locking ...................................... 101Door ........................................................ 100Lockout Protection ................................... 103Power Door ............................................. 101Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 101Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 102

Loss of Control ........................................... 245Low Coolant Warning Light .......................... 174Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 181Low Traction Light ....................................... 173Lumbar

Manual Controls ......................................... 11

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 423At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 428At Least Once a Month ............................ 428At Least Once a Year .............................. 429Introduction .............................................. 418Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 425Maintenance Record ................................ 436Maintenance Requirements ...................... 418Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................... 434Owner Checks and Services .................... 427Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 432Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 420Using ....................................................... 418Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 418

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 175

464

Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 11Manual Reclining Seatbacks .......................... 12Manual Seats .................................................. 9Manual Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 330Operation ................................................. 117

Map Lamps ................................................. 153Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview withOnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ................................................. 125

Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 128Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 127

MP3 ............................................................ 202MyGMLink.com ............................................ 443

NNavigation System, Privacy ......................... 456New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 109Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ....... 434

OOdometer .................................................... 163Odometer, Trip ............................................ 163

Off-Road Driving .......................................... 247Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 243Oil

Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 179Engine ..................................................... 318Pressure Light .......................................... 178

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 323Older Children, Restraints ............................. 42Online Owner Center ................................... 443OnStar, Privacy ........................................... 456OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 128Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 159Outlets

Accessory Power ..................................... 154Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 128Power Mirrors .......................................... 127

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 427Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 405Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 120Shifting Out of ......................................... 121

465

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 119Over Things That Burn ............................ 122

Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 122Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 166Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 159Passenger Sensing System ........................... 82Passing ....................................................... 243Passlock® .................................................... 108Power

Door Locks .............................................. 101Electrical System ..................................... 409Reduced Engine Light .............................. 179Seat .......................................................... 10Windows .................................................. 105

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 41Privacy ........................................................ 455

Event Data Recorders .............................. 455Navigation System ................................... 456OnStar ..................................................... 456Radio Frequency Identification .................. 456

Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 101

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 24

RRadio Frequency Identification (RFID),

Privacy ..................................................... 456Radios ........................................................ 182

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 225Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 225Radio with CD ................................ 186, 192Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 202Setting the Time .............................. 183, 184Understanding Reception ......................... 224

Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 102Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 39Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 211Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 36Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 146Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

OnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ..................................................... 125

Reclining Seatbacks, Manual ......................... 12Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 432Recovery Hook ............................................ 277Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 285Reduced Engine Power Light ...................... 179Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 96Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 97

466

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing theSpare Tire ................................................ 391

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 387Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 364Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 453Saturn ...................................................... 453United States Government ....................... 452

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 90Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 91Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 35Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 445Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 277Roof Rack System ...................................... 134Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 435Running the Engine While Parked ............... 124

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 165Pretensioners ............................................. 41Reminder Light ........................................ 164

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 402Driver Position ........................................... 26How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 25Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 24Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 39Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 36Right Front Passenger Position .................. 35Safety Belt Extender .................................. 41Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 35Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 20Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 34

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 420Seatback, Folding Passenger ........................ 16Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................ 10Head Restraints ......................................... 15Heated Seats ............................................. 11Manual ........................................................ 9Manual Lumbar .......................................... 11Manual Reclining Seatbacks ...................... 12Passenger Folding Seatback ...................... 16Power Seat ................................................ 10Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 18

467

Securing a Child RestraintCenter Rear Seat Position ......................... 64Rear Outside Seat Position ........................ 61Right Front Seat Position ........................... 66

Security Light .............................................. 179Service ........................................................ 304

Accessories and Modifications .................. 304Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 306California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 305Doing Your Own Work ............................. 305Engine Soon Light ................................... 175Publications Ordering Information ............. 453Vehicle Soon Light ................................... 180

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 88Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 405Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 120Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 121Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 34Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 143Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 398Installing .................................................. 391Removing ................................................ 387Storing ..................................................... 397

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 414Speedometer ............................................... 163

Split Folding Rear Seat ................................. 18Starting Your Engine ................................... 111Steering ...................................................... 240Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 223Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 142Storage Areas

Cargo Area .............................................. 132Center Console Storage Area ................... 132Cupholder(s) ............................................ 132Floor Console Storage Area ..................... 132Glove Box ................................................ 132Roof Rack System ................................... 134

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 276Sun Visors .................................................. 106Sunroof ....................................................... 136

TTachometer ................................................. 164Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps ..................................... 363

TCS Warning Light ...................................... 172Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 107

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 107Passlock® ................................................ 108

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 142

468

Time, Setting ...................................... 183, 184Tires ........................................................... 366

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 404Buying New Tires ..................................... 377Chains ..................................................... 384Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 386Cleaning .................................................. 405Compact Spare Tire ................................. 398Different Size ........................................... 379If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 385Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 374Inspection and Rotation ............................ 375Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 391Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 391Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 387Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 397Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 367Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 371Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 380Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 382Wheel Replacement ................................. 382When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 377

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 285Towing a Trailer ....................................... 290Your Vehicle ............................................. 284

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 238Control System Warning Light .................. 172Low Light ................................................. 173

TransaxleFluid, Manual ........................................... 330

Transaxle Operation, Manual ....................... 117Transmission

Up-Shift Light ........................................... 169Trip Odometer ............................................. 163Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 143Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 143

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 224Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 380Up-Shift Light .............................................. 169

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 234Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Design ..................................................... 229Loading .................................................... 279

469

Vehicle (cont.)Parking Your ............................................ 122Service Soon Light ................................... 180Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ............ 455Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 408Service Parts Identification Label .............. 408

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 159Visors .......................................................... 106

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 161Warnings

Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 142Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 382Different Size ........................................... 379Replacement ............................................ 382

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 53

Windows ..................................................... 104Power ...................................................... 105

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 145Washer Fluid ........................................... 341Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 364Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 404Wiper Fuses ............................................ 409Wipers ..................................................... 144

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 146Winter Driving ............................................. 272

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 209XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 225

YYour Driving, the Road and Your Vehicle ..... 228Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 418

470

2007 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M - my.gm.com · Airbag System ..... 71 Restraint System Check ......

Documents

Transcript of 2007 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M - my.gm.com · Airbag System ..... 71 Restraint System Check ......